JP2021083511A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement properties of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine equipped with game control means capable of executing a game includes a variable winning device capable of converting a state between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state. The game control means makes a game value imparted to a player when the game turns out to be a special result in the specific game state different from a game value imparted to the player when the game turns out to be the special result after the specific game state is finished.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54A

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a gaming control means capable of executing a game.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of generating a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-12354

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for further improving the interest of the game.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with a game control means capable of executing a game, a variable winning device capable of converting between an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state is provided, and the game control means is provided. The game value given to the player when the game has a special result in the specific game state is different from the game value given to the player when the game has the special result after the end of the specific game state. ..

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the specific area switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a sorting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time shortening fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the character game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing of a character thing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing while displaying a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the Pyramid residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command processing. This is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state. This is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is a table showing the number of time reductions corresponding to the symbol, which is the type of hit of the special figure variation display game, and the specified number of remaining hold. It is a figure which shows the feature of the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal electric operation. After the big hit of symbol A, a timing chart showing the game state, the normal figure probability (probability of hitting the normal figure), the normal figure state, the normal electric state, the number of holdings of the special figure 2, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. Is. After the big hit of symbol B, a timing chart showing the game state, the normal figure probability (probability of hitting the normal figure), the normal figure state, the normal electric state, the number of holdings of the special figure 2, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. Is. After the big hit of symbol F, a timing chart showing the game state, the normal figure probability (probability of hitting the normal figure), the normal figure state, the normal electric state, the number of holdings of the special figure 2, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. Is. It is a time chart which shows the example 1 of the deviation occurrence of the start timing of the opening of a general electric train and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 2 is a time chart showing Example 2 in which the start timing of the opening of the normal train and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game are different from each other. It is a figure explaining the deviation measures. It is a time chart which shows the effect (effect 1) against the deviation before the deviation measures. It is a time chart which shows the effect (effect 2) on the deviation after the deviation measures. It is a time chart explaining how to increase the remaining hold by stopping. It is a time chart explaining the stop-and-shoot measures. It is a figure which shows an example of the hitting instruction display. It is a figure which illustrates the stepwise change of the striking instruction display. This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 1). This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 2). This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 3). This is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 4). This is another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 1). This is another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 2). Regarding the modified example, it is a table showing the support state, the number of time reductions, the specified number of remaining hold, etc. corresponding to the symbol which is the hit type of the special figure variation display game. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of the normal figure variation display game and the normal electric operation with respect to a modification. It is a figure which shows the opening pattern of the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus (Public electric machine) with respect to a modification (the 1). It is a figure which shows the opening pattern of the ordinary variable prize-winning apparatus (Public electric machine) with respect to a modification (the 2). Regarding the modified example, it is a timing chart showing a game state, a normal figure probability, a normal figure state, a normal electric state, a special figure 2 hold number, a special figure fluctuation, and the like after a big hit with the symbol B. Regarding the modified example, it is a timing chart showing a game state, a normal figure probability, a normal figure state, a normal electric state, a special figure 2 hold number, a special figure fluctuation, and the like after a big hit with the symbol D. Regarding the modified example, it is a timing chart showing a game state, a normal figure probability, a normal figure state, a normal electric state, a special figure 2 hold number, a special figure fluctuation, and the like after a big hit with the symbol E or the symbol F. Regarding the modified example, it is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 1). Regarding the modified example, it is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (No. 2). It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the first half) of the screen transition from the time saving state to the time saving state. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (middle stage) of the screen transition from the time saving state to the time saving state. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the latter half) of the screen transition from the time saving state to the time saving state. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition from the time saving state in the time saving 100 times machine. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition in the modified example of the special figure 2 hold display. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the latter half) of the screen transition in the modified example of the special figure 2 hold display. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition in the modification 2 of the special figure 2 hold display. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition in the modification 3 of the special figure 2 hold display. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in the modified examples 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 hold display. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example of the screen transition in the modification 6 of the special figure 2 hold display.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen by the player during the game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decorative device 1 capable of producing light emission according to the game state 1
8a and 18b are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The lighting member arranged inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25.
It is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. The variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in this specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability change state, a probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (a big hit state).
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate the probabilistic state when the big hit occurs, instead of determining whether or not to generate the probabilistic state by the big hit symbol random number.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when a player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launcher launches a game ball into the game area (speed).
The firing force can be changed in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be launched in various launch modes having different firing forces. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
It has 0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a is used.
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the player. The gaming machine 10
It is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information.
Display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the warp passage 40e and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball that has rolled on the stage portion 40b can easily win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. Upper effect unit 40c and side effect unit 40d
Consists of a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to these general winning openings 35 is performed by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (starting port 1, first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. Center case 40
In the game area 32 on the right side of the above, the ordinary variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, ordinary electric) provided with the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) below the normal drawing start gate 34. Is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated forward to convert the game ball into a state in which it is easy to flow in. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the start winning opening 36 is likely to win a game ball when hitting left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is easy to win a game ball when hitting right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to an open state (a state in which the game is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a special game. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state in which the above-mentioned specific game state is not performed, a time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, even in the probabilistic state (excluding the latent probabilistic state), the time saving state (normal power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7).
A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that opens the lower winning opening is provided by retracting from the front to the back. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and lowers. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening, a predetermined game value (for example, the number of time reductions / the number of probable changes after the prize ball or the end of the big hit) is given to the player. In the lower prize opening, a lower prize opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 is likely to win a game ball when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, the upper winning opening solenoid 39b (FIG. 3)
A second special variable winning device 39 is provided, which has an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper winning opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of tilting to the right. Second special variable winning device 39
Converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and the game ball into the large winning opening. By facilitating the inflow of the game, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, the number of time reductions / the number of probable changes after the end of the prize ball or the big hit). In the large winning opening, an upper large winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 is likely to win a game ball when hitting to the right. Further, the lower prize opening switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the grand prize opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. The big hit is confirmed when the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening) after the opening / closing door 39c is opened by the small hit. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only during a small hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. The game control device 100 is
The passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) can be detected via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V winning is detected, it is confirmed that the state shifts to the big hit state after the small hit ends. Information (such as a specific area passage command) indicating that a V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer (1 type type 2 type machine). In the present embodiment, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by a small hit, so that the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.
A game ball wins a V in a specific area 86 (V winning opening) in the special variable winning device 39, and a big hit occurs.

General winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
When a game ball wins in the 39 major winning openings, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the lower game area 32, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided. Further, in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38, 39 and their vicinity, LEDs capable of emitting light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described later). A part of 46) is arranged.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (hold) of each fluctuation display game. Storage display unit for notification of the number of stored figures (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56)
) And. Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. General figure hold indicator 56
Is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is provided with a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (when it should be hit normally). D7),
When the time saving state occurs, the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the jackpot probability state becomes a high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. The third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D9), and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit.
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed, all the LEDs provided as a display are turned on and off (all LEDs are blinking at the same time) or circulated on (any of them). It may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from one LED), or may be turned on and off (blinking) or circulated by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also in the normal diagram display 53, the variation display game is executed by the variation display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure display 53 is also a special figure 1 display 5
1. It can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special figure variation display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 hold LED 1, special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) according to the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED 1, special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) depending on the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of holds when the display device 41 is not in the state of a big hit (including the case where the display device 41 has a reach described later). Do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning opening will be used as a payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the stored number is added if the normal figure start storage number (normal figure hold number) is less than the upper limit number (the number of stored figures is added (). +1).

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory (normal figure hold), and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the normal map variation display game.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol (normal figure) displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time,
By driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times), and the game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37. Permissible.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game.
A game ball that has won a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and the display device 4
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 hold). .. Further, the game control device 100 uses the special figure 2 display 52 to display the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 hold). To execute.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (blinking) is repeated (blinking) on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. 4th symbol) fluctuates. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a jackpot state (big hit state)
It becomes a special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are the large winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (
By energizing (see FIG. 3), the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the large winning openings provided in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (FIG. 3).
By energizing (see), the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time.
Since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. The value (number of balls acquired) is small. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be called the second special gaming state. For the sake of simplicity, in the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 39 (in the small hit state)
Only the upper big winning opening) is converted to the open state, and only the special variable winning device 38 (lower big winning opening) is converted to the open state in the big hit state (including the big hit state due to V winning during the small hit). explain.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. In addition, the condition device operates in the specific area 86.
It may mean that the game ball has passed (V prize). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of simply winning the small hit lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V prize during the small hit state, the condition device will operate. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is
It is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and is also used in the present specification as a term having the same meaning. ing.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variation display game becomes ready to be executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 hold priority digestion, special figure 2 priority change).

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may not be executed at the same time.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36 is not particularly limited.
a, The start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a, 39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a magnetic field is generated when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a changing phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10.
The game control device 100 includes 0 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a CPU unit having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. , Game microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and controls signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By setting 0, it is possible to exclude from the exchange target and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops below 17V, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
The process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1.
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (effects, etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition is configured. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or may provide a dedicated set value change switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at positions that cannot be operated (positions that cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1) is defined.
), Probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (setting value 3)
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... is changed. In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. It may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work set value and the probability set value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
It includes M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information on the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expectations are different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP)
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set.
The expected degree of jackpot (expected value) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability of becoming a big hit when the production is selected, and the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit and the selection rate of the production when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selectivity and the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. With a random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) The clock generator is provided to generate a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a is the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, CPU 11
1a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), And the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as the above and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
Detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 includes a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A vibration sensor 6 that detects a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the vibration of the gaming machine 10.
The signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the signal from 12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is output from the output unit 13.
It is supplied to each port of 0. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is used for each of the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) that opens the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information at the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the normal electric solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
Current supply of the batch display device 50 output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135 that receive the open / close data signals of c, the winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc. and generate and output the solenoid drive signal. The second driver 138b that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the side, and the third driver that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. A fourth driver 138d is provided which outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the above. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the digit wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. L selected sequentially with
The power supply voltage flows through the ED and it lights up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
No. 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driving driver 150 is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

Although the performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability set value, the accessory ratio, the ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls).
It is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls counts the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 and the like.
Can be obtained by doing. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), And special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings) are included.

The ball output rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls).
It is calculated by multiplying the number of acquired balls by the number of ejected balls (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. In addition, the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (in the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big prize opening ratio) to the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
Is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output is provided in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the output video content, and uses the sound source LSI 314.
It executes processing such as instructing the playback sound to, turning on the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and solenoid, and managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, the synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
The decorative special figure hold number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100 are received as the effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5.
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at V and operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in. The panel decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor or the like. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp, the motor, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34 and stores it in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol on the normal map display 53 in a predetermined time variation, the normal map variation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display 53, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example). 3 seconds x 2 times) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

In addition, the start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is memorized based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the large winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 to control the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. High probability state (probability change state) is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 3 per unit time may be controlled as compared with the normal gaming state in which no special game is performed.
Since the opening time of 7 is controlled so as to be substantially increased, the normal electric support state is set. In addition, it should be noted.
Even in the high-probability state (normal probability-changing state) excluding the latent probability-changing state, the time-saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support is executed.

In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) can be shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening number (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure probability, normal figure hit probability) should be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state. Is possible.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it becomes easier to win the prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal game state in which no special game is performed, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. It can be increased. Also,
It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, the state shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) is changed to a variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. FIG. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

Further, when the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is off, but the RAM initialization switch 11
When 2 is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and R
The AM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply recovered.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer.
Waiting time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from 00 starts normally.
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and delays the activation of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
It serves as a waiting means for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM region for calculation, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A).
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

When the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (the result of A1008 is "N").
, The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"".
), That is, when the standby time has expired, access to RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM that can be read and written is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (state where there is no output). (Set to) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter / Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Start the circuit (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the divided signal.
The U111a is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 indicates RA indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c).
Set the M error flag (A1015). Here, the flag of the assumption of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
The result of 6 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM indicates a RAM error.
Clear the error flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 has a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112.
It is determined whether or not both of the switches are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the variable setting state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”), the game control device 100 has a RAM (here, RAM).
It is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality of 111c) is set (A102).
2). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-A1037 Probability Setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in steps A1041-144, or step A1
The normal power-on (power restoration) processing of 041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 has (A1023) when the probability setting changing flag is set.
The result is "Y"), and a command for notifying the main abnormality error that notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024).
.. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error is the game control device 10.
Notify that there was an abnormality of 0.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the 7-segment display data (“E1” in FIG. 9 (C)) when the game is stopped.
The error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 in order to display it on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
(Turn on both of 12) and wait for the power to be turned on. While the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112)
The process of A1024-A1026 is executed, assuming that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though both of the on-operations) are not executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102).
The result of 2 is "Y"), a command for notifying the main abnormality error that notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and 7 segments when the game is stopped. The display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the on-data of the security signal is externally output in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. Output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). As described above, even when the information about the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. Then step A10
The processes of 25 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y".
”), Since it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared and set to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value“ 1 ”) (A1028). ), Set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed ()
A1029). When the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N".
”), Set the probability setting changing flag without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1).
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the flag for changing the probability setting is not set (the result of A1023 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the processing during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability Set the probability setting checking flag indicating that the setting is being checked (A1032). Then, the command during the probability setting confirmation is sent to the effect control device 30.
It is transmitted to 0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later, but remain when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 allows interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If there is a power outage (result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
The process when a power failure occurs in 61 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure does not occur, the probability setting value can be confirmed in the variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036).
The result is "Y"), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041).
.. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value is 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and the unused area, a work area related to the performance information and its display (performance display), and a configuration that does not clear the stack area are also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball output rate, the base value (the ball output rate in the normal game state), the accessory ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1).
Since the result of 041 is "N") and both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the normal power-on (power recovery) process is started and the power failure recovery process is executed (power recovery process). A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A10.
It shifts to the process of 47.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include the setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating the setting value information (setting information) which is the information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Command) is included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the sound of the LED and speaker of the board decoration device 46 etc. is used for RAM.
Notification of initialization (RAM clear) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command to specify the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting).
, It is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C) in the random number generation circuit
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number) (only when there is a small hit), hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure Save in a predetermined area of RWM as the start value of the initial value (random number of initial value per hit), initial value of random number of fall lottery used in the fall lottery (random number of initial value of fall lottery), etc. (A1048).
Allow interrupts (A1049). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit of the program. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC for timer interrupt processing (CTC)
It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, for jackpot symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if it is not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A).
1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
.. Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals, and so on.
That is, the input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130).
The result of 4 is "N"), and based on the output data set by various processes, the output for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, special winning opening solenoid 39b) and LED drive control (light emission control). The process is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308) and random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring (the front frame and the glass frame are opened). Execute the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1310)
).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes after step A1315 are executed.

The game control device 100 is used when abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N").
, A special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312a).
The details of the special figure game processing will be described later. Subsequently, a character game process for performing a process related to the opening operation of the lower large winning opening of the special variable winning device 38 is executed (A1312b). The details of the character game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1314), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning device 39 is based on the inputs from the large winning port switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning port switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 of the special variable winning device 39. Is monitored, and when an abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is the specific area switch 7.
2 (V winning port switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is passed through and discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2).
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range, the game control device 100 (the result of A2401 is "
Y ”), the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A2402), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability set value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability set value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A).
2404).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 1 set in step A1034.
It is 28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality is sent to the external information terminal 71.
Is output to (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407)
The result of is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is set when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407).
The result is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

When the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A240).
The result of 8 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2).
409). When there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

The game control device 100 receives the input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409).
The result is "Y"), the work setting value in the work setting value area (in RAM111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability of the probability setting value area corresponding to the work setting value. The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during the setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y".
”), The value corresponding to the work setting value in the work setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power failure occurs during the setting change (A1037)
It is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, effect control, etc. is changed to an unintended value in the result of "Y").

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1312a) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2600). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed. In addition, it should be noted.
The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning (winning) of the game ball in the specific area 86 (V winning opening) is executed (A2601). The details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper prize opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
.. In the upper prize opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
Only subtract) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "".
Y "), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure game processing number to execute the game branching process according to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure change display Monitors the change start of the game, sets the change start of the special figure change display game, sets the effect, sets the information necessary for processing during the special figure change, etc. Execute (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like is executed (A2609). For example, in the special symbol changing process, necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set, and the process number "2" related to the special symbol display process is set. Set and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure display processing for setting the information necessary for shifting to the big hit state or the small hit state is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, and the special figure normal processing is performed. Set the processing number "0" related to the above and save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, set necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command and the time before opening the small hit, and process number "3" related to the processing before opening the small hit.
Is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit opening pre-processing is executed (A2611). For example, in the small hit opening pre-processing, the opening time of the large winning opening due to the small hit (small hit opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area and stored in the upper large winning opening solenoid output data area. The on-data is saved, the small hit opening command is set as an effect command, the processing number "4" related to the small hit opening processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit opening process is executed (A2612). For example, in the small hit open processing, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set. Save to the game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit remaining ball processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the processing number “0” related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2614), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2615). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2616), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2617). Next, the lever solenoid control process that controls the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b so as to open the lever solenoid 86b during the small hit is executed, and the special figure game process is completed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and starts the starting winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize in (A2703). When there is no prize in the starting prize opening 36 (
When the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the right-handed game state (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A2707. On the other hand, in the case of a right-handed gaming state (the result of A2704 is "Y"), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of the present embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and the normal variable winning device 37 must be hit by the right side to win a prize. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, during the normal power support state). When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 gives an instruction to right-handed (when it is left-handed).
Warning) is executed on the display device 41 or the like by displaying a right-handed instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2).
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). When there is no prize in the 2nd start prize opening (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), The process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the Fuden fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , The special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in A2713 that an illegal operation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents the start memory from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special figure start port switch common process (A2708, A) in the start port switch monitoring process.
The details of 2715) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N")
Save the updated value in the RWM start port signal output count area (A2904), and step A.
The process proceeds to 2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the number of special figure reservations (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is the upper limit value (here, the number of start memory). 4) It is determined whether or not it is less than (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (4 in this case) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold). The number) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure fluctuation display game that starts by detecting the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, and R
Save in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of WM (A2910). Subsequently, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure variation display game started by the detection of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area (A2911).

In the present embodiment, since the big hit is surely generated by the V winning after the small hit as described above, it is not necessary to use the small hit symbol random number, and step A2911 is optional and may not be executed. Further, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variation display game, if the start port switch to be monitored is the start port 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract the small hit symbol random number.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
913). In the special figure hold information determination process, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the saved jackpot random number and the stop symbol information based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the first half variation number based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (number of variation before reach). And the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation after reach) is set as an effect command. Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as the effect command (A2914), and the effect command setting process (A2915) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Also,
The start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. , Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the specific area switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a small hit is being made (A3001). If the special figure game processing numbers are "4" and "5", it can be determined that a small hit is in progress. When a small hit is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the condition device is operating (A30).
02). If the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set, it can be determined that the condition device is operating.

When the game control device 100 is not operating the condition device (the result of A3002 is "N"),
It is determined whether or not there is an input in the specific area switch 72 (A3003). When there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, a prize in the specific area 86 (
When there is a V prize), the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

When it is not a small hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), when the condition device is operating (A3)
The result of 002 is "Y"), or when there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003).
The result of is "N"), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated without doing anything.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the character of the character game, which will be described later, and
It is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (A3200). When the character is not normally processed or the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N".
”), The process proceeds to step A3215 without starting the special figure variation display game.

The game control device 100 is normally processing the accessory, and the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0.
When (A3200 result is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (A3206).
.. Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3211), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (A32).
When the result of 11 is "N"), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (A).
3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a production command (
A3213), the effect command setting process is performed (A3214), and the process proceeds to step A3215. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has already started in step A3211 (A32).
The result of 11 is "Y"), and "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3215).
), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3216), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N".
”), The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (A3202), and the decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3203).
), The effect command setting process is executed (A3204). Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the normal process of the special figure is terminated.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process of the special figure 2, "1" is set as the processing number, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag is set. Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N".
”), The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (A3207), and the decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3208).
), The effect command setting process is executed (A3209). Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the special figure of the special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the normal process of the special figure is terminated.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process of special figure 1, "1" is set as the processing number, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag is cleared. Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 hold priority digestion). That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game. When the special figure 1 variable display game is to be executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game, the determination in step A3201 is determined by the special figure 1 hold number ≠ 0. It suffices to judge whether or not it is.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3207) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 1 variation display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss or a big hit and the missed stop symbol pattern or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In addition, the number of rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number are acquired and saved.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number), which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).
.. Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed. Further, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of special figure reservations related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 12 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 uses the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the above is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 2 variation display game (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the information that the jackpot flag is out of the 1 area (A36).
01). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (A)
The result of 3605 is "N"), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing", and there is no "small hit".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 14 is performed for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the information that the game control device 100 is out of the jackpot flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the prepared large hit random number is a small hit is executed according to whether or not the prepared large hit random value matches the small hit determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transmits the small hit information to the large hit flag 2 area in which the loss information is saved in step A3701. Overwrite and save (A3706), and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit judgment process (A3704) is not a small hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit is optionally prepared depending on whether or not the prepared big hit random value matches the big hit judgment value. A jackpot determination process for determining whether or not is may be executed (A3707).
.. When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3707) is a jackpot (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3709) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3707) is not a big hit (A)
The result of 3708 is “N”), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while the information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "small hit" or "missing", but as an option, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is "big hit". It is also possible to provide a configuration.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like (
Details of A3604 and A3707) will be described. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure hold information determination process and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A380).
The result of 2 is "Y"), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A3804), and the big hit judgment process is completed.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3803). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "
Y ”), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A3804). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3803 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3805). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure hold information determination process and the like.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3901). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is
When it is equal to or more than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is equal to or less than the small hit upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure variation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, it should be noted that
A small hit random number is not provided independently, and a large hit random number is used for determining a small hit, but a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A3903).
The small hit determination process ends.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 2) is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), a deviation is set as the judgment result (A3903).
.. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "
N "), a small hit is set as a determination result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends. In the present embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability becomes 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability is another value. But it may be.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001). Jackpot flag 1
Is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4002). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (A4003), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area of the RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A40).
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 5).
This is for setting the stop symbol in 1) and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Then, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of RWM (A4007), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area. Save to (A4008). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the time reduction determination data.
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4013.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4011).
), The detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4012). After that, the process proceeds to step A4013.

After steps A4010 and A4012, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4013). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4014). As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4015), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4016). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, whether or not the small hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4101). Jackpot flag 2
Is a small hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4102). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area of the RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In the present embodiment, the game ball wins a V by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit, and a big hit is generated immediately after the small hit. Therefore, the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Even if (the big hit flag 2 is a small hit), the big hit symbol random number is loaded. But,
It is also possible to load the small hit symbol random number (A2911) and acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number. In this configuration, when V is won (the result of A3003 in FIG. 10 is "Y"".
(When), the big hit symbol random number is loaded, the stop symbol number is acquired, and step A4107
You may execute the process from A4110.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A41).
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 5).
This is for setting the stop symbol in 2) and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Then, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area of RWM (A4107), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area. Save to (A4108). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the time reduction determination data.
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol BG described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4114.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area. Is determined (A4111). When the small hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the processing after step A4102, but the special figure 2 big hit symbol table and the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table which are different from the case of the small hit May be used.

In the game control device 100, when the small hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N".
”), The stop symbol number at the time of detachment is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4112), and the detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4113). After that, the process proceeds to step A4114.

In this embodiment, since the "big hit" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the process of step A4111 is optional and does not have to be executed. That is, when the big hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the process may proceed to step A4112.

After steps A4110 and A4113, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4114). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4115). The decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4116), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4117). ). Further, when the small hit symbol random number (A2911) is extracted, the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and detects the game ball with the normal variable winning device 37. As a variable display game based on the above, the variable display game execution means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the special figure information setting process (A340) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
4. Details of A3504) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like. It should be noted that the fluctuation may be directly distributed based on the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variable group selection pointer table (A).
4201), the first half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (A4).
202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203).
, Acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information 1 area (A4206).
). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holdes does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half as a result. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variable group selection pointer table (A).
4207), the latter half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (A4).
208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209).
, Acquire offset data corresponding to the target number of special symbols held and the stop symbol pattern (A42)
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information 2 area (A4212).
), End the special figure information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.
The details of 3406 and A3506) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A430).
1) Obtain the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2, prepare (A4302), and load the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1). , Prepare (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the one for hitting and the one for hitting. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (A4304), and if it is out of order (the result of A4304 is “Y”), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (the result of A4304 is "N"), the sorting process (A4306) is performed and step A is performed.
The process proceeds to 4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares (A4307) the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, and holds the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (hold). Load the variation pattern random number 2 from (for equation 1) and prepare it (A4308). Then, the distribution process is executed (A4309), the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (A4310). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is generated from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Load 3 and prepare (A4314). afterwards,
The distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. 2
The byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half fluctuation pattern is ".
In the latter half variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order) that specifies only the latter half variable selection table that is "no reach", there is no need to sort, so the sort value is "0". That is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data in the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is specified. Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404).
, It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half variable group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the previous step A4405 is acquired.
A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in (A44).
04), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

In step A4405, it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4).
Execute until the result of 405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the selection table (second half variable group table). Then, in step A4405, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (A4407), and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the distribution process (A4306, A4309, A43) in the variation pattern setting process.
The details of 15) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sorting process. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 starts with the head data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). Check if is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, in the game control device 100, when the first data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is completed. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (
The first distribution value specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. And calculate a new random number value (A45
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to the process of step A4503, and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). In step A4505, the new random number value is "0" in the above process.
”(The result of A4505 is“ Y ”). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and first half fluctuation pattern (first half) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) One of the latter half fluctuation selection tables, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from the fluctuation number).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the sorting process is completed.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting processing (A) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.
The details of 3407 and A3507) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variable display game to be started is the special figure 2 variable display game (A4600a). When the variable display game to be started is not the special figure 2 variable display game but the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), the random number storage areas of the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared ( A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A).
4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460).
6), save the added value (total variation time value) in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607).
.. After that, prepare a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number (A4608), and
Prepare a variable command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variable number as a production command (
A4609), the effect command setting process is performed (A4610). Next, the number of special symbol reservations corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag indicating the variable symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to be started is updated by -1 (
A4611), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (A4).
612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

First, when the variable display game to be started is the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a big hit. Whether or not it is determined (A4600b). Special Figure 2 The variable display game that starts when the result of the variable display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4600b is "Y") is Special Figure 1.
The processing after step A4601 is executed in the same manner as in the case of the variable display game.

The game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a missed result. The fluctuation time value (total variation time value) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation number (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the jackpot is completed is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4615).
..

Therefore, the fluctuation time value of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are set by distribution (lottery) and are not fixed, but are out of alignment. The fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case is a fixed time value set for each special figure 2 fluctuation number after the end of the big hit. That is, the rotation speed is controlled for the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is also possible to set the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit to a fixed time value.

After that, the game control device 100 uses variable commands (MODE, AC) corresponding to the variable time value.
TION) is prepared as an effect command, and the processes after step A4610 are executed.

In addition, when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) regarding the mode (contents) of the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later, the fluctuation time value is the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 after the end of the big hit. Not only that, it may be set corresponding to the support state.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure fluctuation processing (A2609) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change of the special figure.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation is in progress (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A4801). When the special figure 2 is not changing, that is, when the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is running) (the result of A4801 is "N"), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set. (A4802).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is changing in FIG. 2 (the result of A4801 is "Y").
, Special figure 2 Whether the variable display game or not the result is a small hit or a big hit (A480)
3). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stop symbol (stop display) that is the result of the variable display game.

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit or a big hit, the game control device 100 is used.
That is, in the case of a loss (the result of A4803 is "N"), the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 after the end of the big hit (
The display time corresponding to the special figure 2 (number of times the variable display game is executed) is set (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are non-fixed times based on the stop symbol pattern set by the lottery, but are out of alignment. The display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case is fixedly set for each special figure 2 fluctuation number of times (the number of times of execution of the special figure 2 variable display game) after the end of the big hit. It is also possible to set the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit in a fixed manner.

As will be described later, when the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) regarding the mode (contents) of the normal power support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special figure 2 after the end of the big hit.
It may be set not only according to the number of fluctuations but also according to the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special figure game processing timer area (A4805). After that, the process transition setting process during display of the special figure is executed (A4806). In the special figure display process transition setting process, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area, and the special figure 1
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area.
After that, the processing during the special figure change is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display processing (A2610) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure. FIG. 25A shows the first half part of the special figure display processing, and FIG. 25B shows the second half part of the special figure display processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation shown in FIG. 1 is the one executed this time (A5001). That is, it is determined whether or not the display of the stop symbol (stop display) is related to the special figure 1 variable display game. When the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the jackpot flag 1 is loaded (A5002), the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5003), and the loaded jackpot flag 1 is loaded. Determines whether or not it is a big hit (A5
004).

In the game control device 100, when the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A5004).
The result is “Y”), the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5005), and the process proceeds to step A5006. If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A5004 is "N"), step as it is.
Move to the processing of A5006.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (A5006).
). In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1, 0 is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared. After that, the processing during display of the special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 executes the variation shown in FIG. 2 this time (A500).
The result of 1 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 is loaded (A5007), and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (A5008). The loaded jackpot flag 2 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (A5009). When the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A5009 is "Y"),
The condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5010), and the process proceeds to step A5006. If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A5009 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit or a miss, step A5.
The process proceeds to 011.

In this embodiment, since the "big hit" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the processes of steps A5009 and A5010 are optional and do not have to be executed. That is, after step 5008, the process of step A5011 may be started.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a small hit (A5).
011). When the big hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A5011 is "Y"), the small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5012), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5013). Then, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded as an effect command from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (A5014), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5015). After that, the small hit release pre-processing transition setting process is executed (A5016).
, Ends the processing while displaying the special figure.

In the small hit opening pre-processing transition setting processing, 3 is set as the processing number related to the small hit opening pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the time before small hit opening (for example, 300 m) is set.
s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, when it is missed (the result of A5011 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process (A5017) for updating the time reduction variation number. Is executed, and the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting is executed (A5018). Then, the number of remaining rotations for switching preparation (number of remaining games for switching preparation) corresponding to the production mode number is set (A5019), and whether or not the remaining number of rotations for production (number of remaining games for production) and the remaining number of rotations for switching preparation match. (A5020).

The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.

In the game control device 100, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect and the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation do not match (A).
The result of 5020 is "N"), and the above-mentioned special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5023).
, Ends the processing while displaying the special figure.

On the other hand, when the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (the result of A5020 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the effect mode switching preparation command as the effect command (A5021), and produces the effect. After performing the command setting process (A5022), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5023), and the special figure display process is terminated.

The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the look-ahead effect from being performed several times before the effect mode is switched (several games before), and by transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production across modes. In the present embodiment, when the number of time reductions (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations described later) is less than a predetermined value (for example, 5), the effect mode (time reduction mode # 1) corresponding to the time reduction state (normal power support state) is provided. ) And the second start memory generated by the Fuden support (
In the effect mode (remaining hold digestion mode) corresponding to the digestion (after the time saving state) of the special figure 2 start memory and the special figure 2 hold), the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation may be set to 0, and the pre-reading effect may be performed to the maximum. ..

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update process (A5017) in the process during display of the special figure will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation number update process.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1) (A52).
01), it is determined whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations has become 0 (A5202). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5202 is "N"), that is, if the time reduction state (Public electricity support state) continues even in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the time reduction fluctuation number update process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 has a probability information command (when the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5202 is "Y"), that is, when the time reduction state ends in the special figure fluctuation display game this time. (End of time reduction) is prepared as an effect command (A5203), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5204). Then, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (A5205), and the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (A5206).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a number without a time reduction in the game status display number area (A).
5207), the low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A5208).
Then, the probability information command (normal) is saved in the transmission command area when the power is restored (A52).
09), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal map fluctuation display game (probability of hitting the normal figure, probability of hitting the normal figure) becomes a high probability (high probability of the normal figure) in the time saving state, and is normal except in the time saving state. The probability of hitting a figure variation display game (probability of hitting a normal figure, probability of hitting a normal figure) becomes a low probability (low probability of a normal figure).

In addition, the time reduction variation number update process is performed when the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A501).
Since the result of 1 is executed only in "N"), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 only in the special figure 2 variation display game. Therefore, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is that the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined value (the number of times shortening and the initial value of the number of times shortening fluctuations). However, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of order, by updating the time reduction number of fluctuations by -1, the time saving end condition is set to the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 after the end of the big hit (special figure 1). The total number of executions of the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) may reach a predetermined value. Alternatively, the time saving end condition is that the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 after the end of the jackpot reaches the first predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), or the total number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 after the end of the jackpot. May reach any of the second predetermined number of times (for example, twice the first predetermined value = 10 times).

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5018) in the process during display of the special figure will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a non-update code (A5401). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (the result of A5401 is "Y"), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the next mode transition information is not an update-free code (A54).
When the result of 01 is "N"), the remaining rotation speed of the production, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the production mode is changed, is updated by -1 (A5402), and whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the production becomes 0. (A5403). Here, the remaining number of rotations of the effect is updated by -1 only when the main special figure variation display game (here, the special figure 2 variation display game) is executed this time.
Even if it is a non-main variable display game (here, the special figure 1 variable display game), a configuration in which -1 is updated is also possible.

Depending on the game state and the like, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is defined as the main variable display game. For example, the main variable display game (main variable display game) is the one that is frequently executed among the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and is not the main variable display game (subordinate variable display game). Game) is special figure 1
The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which are not frequently executed. The game control device 100 and / or the effect control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating a main variable display game according to a game state or the like.

If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not 0 (the result of A5403 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5413. Further, when the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is "Y"), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5404). , Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5405).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted, and RW.
Save in the effect mode number area in M (A5406), acquire the effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the effect remaining rotation speed area in RWM (A5407).
, Acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5408).

When the effect mode is shifted by the end of the time saving state (time reduction fluctuation number = 0), the remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the effect mode to be shifted is set to the specified remaining hold number (for example, 4 to 9).
May be set to. The number of remaining hold is the number of special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) that is consumed after the end of the time saving state, and is the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 after the end of the time saving state. The remaining hold is caused by winning the ordinary variable winning device 37, which is opened by hitting the normal figure during the time saving state. In this way, the remaining hold digestion mode (FIG. 54) can be set as the effect mode corresponding to the remaining hold (special figure 2 hold, special figure 2 start memory) during digestion.

Alternatively, if the effect mode is changed when the opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (corresponding to the latter half opening described later), which is opened by hitting the normal figure during the time saving state, is completed, the effect remaining of the effect mode to be shifted. The rotation speed (initial value) may be set to the special figure 2 hold number at that time. As a result, the mode after the end of the opening of the normal electric power (FIG. 54A) is set as the effect mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold after the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is opened by hitting the normal figure during the time saving state is completed. Can be set. Further, in this case, the remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode that shifts when the time reduction state ends (time reduction fluctuation number = 0) is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6 minus the time reduction number) according to the time reduction number. ), And the mode before the end of opening the normal power (FIG. 54A) can be set.

Further, when the effect mode is switched by the end of the time saving state (time reduction fluctuation number = 0), the effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode to be shifted is set to the special figure 2 hold number or the special figure 2 at that time. It may be set to a predetermined number equal to or less than the number of holds. In this way, as an effect mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold number or the predetermined number of remaining hold (special figure 2 hold, special figure 2 start memory) at the end of the time reduction, the time reduction medium occurrence residual hold digestion mode (Fig. 54B) can be set. Remaining hold during time reduction The remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the effect mode that shifts after the digestion mode is set to the specified number of remaining hold (for example, 1).
0) minus the number of remaining holds digested in the time-saving and medium-time occurrence residual hold digestion mode (excess hold number)
Can be set to. In this way, the excess hold digestion mode (FIG. 54B) can be set as the effect mode after the time saving and medium generation residual hold digestion mode.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on the presence / absence of time reduction, and information on the effect mode) corresponding to the newly set effect mode number as the effect command (A5409). , It is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of recovery from a power failure (A5410). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A5410 is “Y”), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the process proceeds to step A5412.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A5410 is "N"), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5411). ), The effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5412).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A5413), and executes the effect command setting process (A5414).
). As a result, the effect control device 300 can acquire the effect remaining rotation speed. Next, prepare a time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number as an effect command (A541).
5) Execute the effect command setting process (A5416). As a result, the effect control device 30
When 0, the number of time reduction fluctuations can be acquired.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode when a new effect mode number is acquired in step A5406 (A5417).
If the mode is not left-handed (the result of A5417 is "N"), the effect mode information check process ends. Also, in the left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is "Y").
To prepare a left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A5418), execute an effect command setting process (A5419), and end the effect mode information check process.

The effect mode information check process is performed when the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (A50).
Since the result of 11 is executed only in "N"), the remaining rotation speed of the effect is updated by -1 only in the special figure 2 variable display game (A5402). As a result, the effect mode can be updated only according to the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2. However, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, the remaining rotation speed of the production is -1.
You may update. In this way, the effect mode can be updated according to the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game).

[Character game processing]
Next, the details of the accessory game processing (A1312b) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the accessory game processing. In the accessory game process, the entire process related to the jackpot state is controlled.

First, the game control device 100 executes the lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process (A5601).
.. In the lower grand prize opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the accessory game processing timer is not 0 (1).
Only subtract) (A5602). The accessory game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the accessory game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the accessory game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the character game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the character game processing ends.

In the game control device 100, when the accessory game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "
Y "), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the character game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the character game processing number is set in the register (A5604). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the character game processing number is acquired by using the character game sequence branch table (A5605).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the character game processing number to execute the game branching process according to the character game processing number (A5606).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A5606, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The character that sets the start of the big hit is usually processed (A5607). For example, in the character normal processing, the processing number "1" related to the processing during fanfare is set in a predetermined case and saved in the character game processing number area. The details of the usual processing of the accessory will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A5606, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The processing during fanfare is executed (A5608). For example, in the processing during fanfare,
The process number "2" related to the process during the interval is set and saved in the accessory game process number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A5606, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Process during the interval is executed (A5609). For example, in the process during the interval, the number of rounds is updated by +1 and the lower prize opening opening time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the on-data is saved in the lower prize opening solenoid output data area, and the round command is issued. Set as an effect command, set the processing number "3" related to the processing during the jackpot opening, and save it in the accessory game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A5606, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information required to perform the jackpot remaining ball processing is set. Is executed (A5610). For example, in the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, a processing number "4" related to the big hit remaining ball processing is set, and the processing number is saved in the accessory game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A5606, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is the final round, the jackpot remaining ball processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, setting the information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing, etc. is executed. (A5611). For example, in the jackpot remaining ball processing, the interval time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area if it is not the final round, the processing number “2” related to the processing during the interval is set, and the interval time is saved in the accessory game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the bonus game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the bonus game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A5606, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Execute the jackpot end processing that sets the information necessary for executing the character normal processing (A)
5612). For example, in the big hit end process, it is necessary to have a normal power support state (time reduction state) after the big hit state is completed, based on the time reduction determination data including information on the presence / absence of the time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the big hit end. Set the information, and the processing number "0" related to the normal processing of the character
Is set and saved in the character game processing number area.

[Usual processing of characters]
Next, the details of the character normal processing (A5607) in the above-mentioned character game processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing of the accessory.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the condition device is operating (A5801).
). When the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004,
A5005, A5010), that is, the jackpot flag 1 or the jackpot flag 2 has jackpot information, or there is a prize in the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (input to the specific area switch 72, V winning). In this case, it can be determined that the condition device is in operation. When the condition device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the normal processing of the accessory is terminated.

The game control device 100 is used when the condition device is operating (the result of A5801 is "Y").
, The round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round number upper limit value area (A5802). Subsequently, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), the probability information command (normal) is prepared as an effect command (A5804), and the effect command setting process is performed. Execute(
A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as an effect command (A5806), and executes the effect command setting process (A58).
07). Then, load the decoration special figure command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command) from the decoration special figure command area of the special figure that became a big hit or a small hit this time, prepare it as a production command (A5808), and produce the production. The command setting process is executed (A5809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves the signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). .. Then, the initial value is saved in the round number area (A).
5812). The initial value is 0 when the condition device is operating according to the jackpot information, and 1 when the condition device is operating due to the winning of the specific area 86 (V winning).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during fanfare (A581).
3) Finish the normal processing of the character. For example, in the fanfare processing transition setting processing, "1" is set as the processing number related to the fanfare processing, the processing number is saved in the character game processing number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the character game processing timer area. , Clear the time reduction fluctuation frequency area.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (A5612) in the above-mentioned character game processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data (A4009, A4109) is data with a time reduction (A6001). The data with time reduction indicates that the time reduction state (Public electricity support state) will be reached after the jackpot state ends. The data without time reduction indicates that the time reduction state (normal power support state) does not occur after the jackpot state ends.

When the time reduction determination data is data without a time reduction, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in order to shift to the normal game state after the jackpot ends, and the time reduction determination data has a time reduction. In the case of data, the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6003) in order to shift to the time saving state (general power support state) after the jackpot ends.

The game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6004), and sets the effect mode transition information (A4010, A4010) set in the stop 1 symbol setting process or the stop 2 symbol setting process.
The address of the table corresponding to A4110) is acquired (A6005), and the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot state is acquired and saved (A6006). As a result, the effect mode that shifts after the big hit can be selected.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the remaining effect rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6007). For example, the effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) is the number of time reductions (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) or the total number of time reductions and the specified number of remaining reservations (for example, 10 times). As a result, for example, after the jackpot ends, the same effect mode can be continued until the time reduction ends or until all the special figure 2 variable display games related to the remaining hold are executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the next mode transition information, which is the information of the transition of the effect mode to the next mode, which is set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (A6009). Then, the probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag and the effect mode number newly set this time is prepared as an effect command (A6009), and the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6010). ), The effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence / absence of time reduction (Public power support), and the effect mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A6012), and executes the effect command setting process (A6013).
Then, a time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number (here, the initial value of the time reduction number) is prepared as an effect command (A6014), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the effect mode transition information area (A6016), and then
The character normal process transition setting process is executed (A6017), and the jackpot end process is terminated. In the character normal processing transition setting process, in order to shift to the character normal processing, the processing number "0" related to the character normal processing is set, the processing number is saved in the character game processing number area, and the condition device operation information. Clear the area and clear the time reduction judgment data area.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

First, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the end of the big hit in the external information output data area (A6201), saves the signal related to the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6202), and sets the batch display device 50. 2 The normal number is saved in the game status display number 2 area as the display data of the game status display unit 58 (ramp D17) (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6204), and saves the special figure time reduction flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6).
205). Then, the time reduction fluctuation frequency region is cleared (A6206), and the batch display device 50
As the display data of the first game status display unit 57 (lamp D7), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 1 area (A6207), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal relating to the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6401), and saves a signal relating to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6402). Then, the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6403).
A6404).

Next, the game control device 100 is the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D) of the batch display device 50.
As the display data of 17), the number during the time reduction is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A640).
5), the high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6406), and the special figure time reduction / medium flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A6407).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has become a big hit after the end of the time reduction, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game related to the remaining hold has become a big hit (
A6408). When the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit or when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit during the time saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), the stop symbol pattern in the time reduction fluctuation number region ( Alternatively, the initial value (time reduction number of times) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the symbols A to F described later) is saved (A6409), and the processing after step A6411 is executed.

When the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit after the end of the time reduction, that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game related to the remaining hold becomes a big hit (the result of A6408 is "A6408".
Y ”), the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number, 99 in this case) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number region (A6410).

After that, the game control device 100 uses the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A described later).
-G), the type of the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern), which is the state (mode) of the normal power support, is saved in the support state area (A6411). In addition, step A6411
The processing of is optional and is executed when the support state regarding the mode (content) of the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 is the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D) of the batch display device 50.
As the display data of 7), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 1 area (A6).
412), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6413), the effect command setting process is executed (A6414), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game processing, monitoring the input of the gate switch 34a and controlling the entire processing related to the normal map fluctuation display game,
Set the display of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
Only subtract) (A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set game sequence branch table of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the game processing number of the game, and the game branching process according to the game processing number of the game is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Monitoring the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, setting the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, setting the effect, setting the information necessary for processing during the normal map fluctuation, etc. Execute (A7608). The details of the normal processing will be described later.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing (the game control device 100). A7609). For example, in the normal map variable processing, in order to shift to the normal map display processing, "2" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal map game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set and the normal map hitting process is performed. (A7610), the process during display of the general map, which sets the information necessary for performing the above, is executed. For example, in the normal map display process, when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, "3" is set as the game process number and the normal map game process number area is set in order to shift to the normal map hit process. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the normal drawing game processing number, "0" is set as the game processing number and the game is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 normally continues the processing during the normal drawing or sets the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal processing per figure, after setting to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the normal electric remaining ball processing. Save to the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ). For example, in the Fuden remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the Fuzu hit end processing, "5" is set as the game processing number and saved in the Fuzu game processing number area, and the Fuzu ending time is set to the Fuzu game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal figure per end process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the normal figure game process number area in order to shift to the normal figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (general map) by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (A7604).
If the result of is "N"), that is, the time is not up, the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the general game game process shown in FIG. 33.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y "), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A7702). The right-handed game state is a big hit state and a time saving state (general electric support state). If the game is in a right-handed game state (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. When the game is not in a right-handed game state (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) instructing left-handed on the display device 41 or the like by displaying the left-handed instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal figures and determines whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (1 in the present embodiment) (A7705). When the number of holdings of the normal map is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is in the changing (running) or hitting state of the normal map variation display game. Whether or not it is determined (A7706). Normal map fluctuation display When the game is neither variable nor in the normal map hitting state (the result of A7706 is "N")
, Update the number of reserved figures by +1 (A7707). In this way, the number of reserved figures is updated by +1 only when the game is not changing or the game is not hit, and as soon as the game is updated by +1 the number of reserved figures is exhausted. Is not substantially accumulated and becomes 1 momentarily only immediately before the start of the normal map fluctuation display game (the number of normal map reservations becomes practically 0).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures (A7708). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (A7709), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7710), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N") and the game control device 100 determines that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"). Or, if the game is changing or hitting the normal map (A7)
When the result of 706 is “Y”), the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the Fuzu game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Fukuden winning switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state, that is, whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times in the hit state. (A7801). And if it is hitting the normal map (the result of A7801 is "Y")
, It is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). When there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, in the game control device 100, the number of counts of the updated general electric counter is the upper limit value (for example,
It is determined whether or not 10) has been reached (A7804). Then, when the count reaches the upper limit value (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the hit end pointer area in the RWM, and the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded. It is saved in the control pointer area during drawing (A7805).

Finally, the Fuzu game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the Fuden winning switch monitoring process is completed. That is, if there is a normal electric winning prize equal to or higher than the upper limit value during the hitting state of the normal drawing, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal drawing at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed. It is made so that the hit state of the normal figure ends in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting the normal drawing (the result of A7801 is "N"), and when it is determined that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N"). ), Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (A780)
The result of 4 is "N"), and the Fuden winning switch monitoring process is completed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a procedure for normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901).
.. If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the hit random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of RWM. (
The hit symbol random number is loaded from (for 1 hold number), and the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) after loading are cleared to 0 (A7902). .. Furthermore, whether or not the probability of winning the result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal figure high probability (in the high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal power support state). (A7903). In this embodiment, the range of hit random numbers is 0 to 250, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 251/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.
Is. Not limited to this, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7904).
), When the high probability of the normal figure is in progress (the result of A7903 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (0 in this case), which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure, is set (A7905), and step A7906 Move to the processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). The upper limit judgment value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal figure. When the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
In the case of a loss, the process proceeds to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "
Y "), that is, in the case of deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
.. Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the outlier symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "
N "), that is, in the case of a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is set. The stop symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. Here, there is only one type of hit stop symbol (normal symbol per symbol), but there may be several types in the modified examples described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4), save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per normal figure (A7916), and clear the free area after shift to 0 (A7917).
), The number of reserved figures is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one.
By this processing, the value for the number of reserved numbers of normal figures 1 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared and becomes 0, and the number of reserved numbers of normal figures is decremented to 0.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the information of the support state (support mode, normal electric opening pattern) (A7919). The process of step A7919 is optional and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of the normal power support, is variable as in the modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal figure fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal figure game processing timer area (A7920). When the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern), which is the state (mode) of the normal power support, is variable as in the modified example described later, a variable normal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support state is set. Then, save it in the normal map game processing timer area. Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the normal figure is executed (A7921), and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated. The process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map will be described later.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reserved figures is 0 (the result of A7901 is "".
Y ”), set“ 0 ”as the processing number for shifting to normal processing (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (A7294), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map. The process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map is executed in step A7921 in the normal process of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 has "1" as a processing number for shifting to the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.
Is set (A8101), and the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A8102).
).

After that, the game control device 100 receives a signal regarding the start of the normal figure variation display game (normal symbol 1).
The fluctuating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8103), and the fluctuating flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (A8103).
A8104). Then, the initial value of the blinking control timer, which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (A8105), and the initial value (here, 0) is set in the ordinary figure fluctuation symbol number area. Save (A8106). After that, the process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (A7609) in the normal map game processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" (A8301) as a setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map, and saves the process number in the normal map game process number area (A8301).
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal map display time (normal map stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display device, in the normal map game processing timer area ( A8303).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal diagram (the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (A8).
305) Ends the process during the change of the normal map.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (A7610) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during display of a normal map.

First, the game control device 100 loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing of the normal drawing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A84).
02). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

When the hit information is set in the hit flag, the game control device 100 has (A8403).
The result of is "Y"), the hit processing setting table is set (A8404), the hit start pointer value (0 in this case) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired, and saved in the normal figure hit control pointer area. (A8405). In addition, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit end pointer area (A8406). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A8407). By the above processing, the normal variable winning device 3 in the time saving state
The opening mode of 7 is set, and for example, it can be opened twice. In addition, the hit normal figure stop symbol (
There is only one type of symbol per normal figure), and the hit start pointer value, hit end pointer value, and normal power release time are fixed, but as in the modified example described later, the support state related to the normal power support (support mode, support mode, When the normal power release pattern) is variable, the hit start pointer value corresponding to the support state,
The hit end pointer value and the normal power release time may be set and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 has "3" as a processing number for shifting to the processing during the normal drawing.
(A8408), and save the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A840).
9). After that, the signal related to the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game (the medium signal per normal symbol is turned on).
Then, the signal related to the start of normal electric operation (normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). Further, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the Fuden solenoid (A8411).
..

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), and determines the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37. Clear the information in the area of the number of illegal winnings of the Fuden to be stored (A8413). Finally, a flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is saved in the Fudaden fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

When the hit information is not set in the hit flag, the game control device 100 has (A840).
The result of 3 is "N"), and "0" is set as the processing number for shifting to normal processing (A).
8415), the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A8416). afterwards,
The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the processing during the normal map display is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (A7611) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the normal drawing.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during normal drawing (A860).
1) It is determined whether or not the value of the loaded control pointer per normal map has reached the upper limit value of the control pointer per normal map (hit end pointer value) (A8602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer during normal drawing does not reach the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer during normal drawing (the hit end pointer value), the game control device 100 (the result of A8602 is "N"). , The control pointer is updated by +1 during normal drawing (A8603). Further, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal process is terminated. The details of the normal operation transition setting process will be described later.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (the hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is “Y”).
, The normal operation transition setting process is executed (A8604) without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal figure hitting process control pointer area in step A8603, and the normal drawing hitting process is terminated.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal process per figure will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

First, the game control device 100 branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing) (A8701). Here, the control pointer is set to step A8603.
Use the value before updating with. Examples of control pointers are shown in FIGS. 56, 72, and 73, which will be described later. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the wait after the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. Time (Public train interval time, for example 60,000 msec
) Is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (A8702). In addition, when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) related to the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later,
The wait time (normal train interval time) may be set according to the support state.

Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is an odd value, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The opening time of the winning device 37, which is the opening time of the winning device 37, is saved in the normal drawing game processing timer area (A8704). The normal power opening time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (for example, 3000 msec). Further, on-data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is the hit end pointer value, the game control device 10
0 sets "4" as the processing number in order to move to step A8706, end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37, and execute the normal electric remaining ball processing (A7612) (A8706).
), Save the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A8707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal figure game processing timer area (A8708). After that, off data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to set the Fuden solenoid 37c to off (A8709).
), Ends the normal operation transition setting process. In addition, when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) related to the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later, the normal power remaining ball processing time may be set according to the support state.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the Fuden remaining ball processing (A7612) in the Fuzu game processing will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing the remaining spheres of the normal electric power.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "5" related to the end processing per normal drawing (A8).
901), the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A8902). After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A8903). In addition, when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) related to the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later, the normal power figure ending time may be set according to the support state.

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8904).
Then, the normal electric count number area for counting the number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 is cleared (A).
8905) Further, the control pointer area is cleared during normal drawing (A8906). After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A8907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is finished.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (A7613) in the per-figure game processing will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per normal drawing.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "0" related to the normal processing of the normal drawing (A910).
1) Further, the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A9102). After that, the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game (the middle signal per normal symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104).
After that, the end processing for each normal figure is completed.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 44
Is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (
B0001). Next, the initial settings of CPU311 and VDP312 are executed (B0002, B).
0003) Allow interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is enabled, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC reading process may be configured to read the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, steps B0003 and B0004). May be executed between). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM.
RT only once when the time information is read from RTC338 or when the power is turned on at a predetermined cycle.
When the time information is read from C338, the time timer (timekeeping means) may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
The hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process (B0015) that edits and controls the contents of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41, and determines the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Execute the effect display editing process (B0017). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B).
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0023 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0023 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103)
), Copy the contents of the receive command buffer of RAM to the command area for analysis (B11)
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer contains 32 received commands.
It is configured so that up to one can be saved. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the analysis command area. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y".
”), Load the received command content in the analysis command area (B1107), and execute the received command analysis process to analyze the content (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE unit (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower levels of the received command are M.
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.) is determined. Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (B1203)
The result is "Y"), and the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, for example, a variable command. Then, when the MODE section represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206).
), Ends the received command analysis process.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the hit command (B).
1207). The hit-type command is a command for commanding operations related to the production during a big hit or a small hit (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.). For example, a fanfare command for commanding a fanfare screen or a round screen is used. These include a round command for commanding, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, and an ending command for commanding an ending screen. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the hit command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of symbol commands (B).
1209). The symbol-based commands include, for example, a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of one-shot commands (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 11 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "Y".
”), The look-ahead symbol system command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead symbol command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). The look-ahead variation command includes, for example, a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. If the MODE section is not in the normal range (B1202 result is "N"), the ACTION section is not in the normal range (B1203 result is "N"), or AC for the MODE section.
Even if the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the reception command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 46) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B).
1302), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). And when the MODE part represents the command of RAM initialization, (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery system command when the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N") (the result of B1303 is "N"). B1305). For example, there are a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command as power failure recovery commands. Then, when the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B13)
The result of 05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a power failure recovery system command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B13)
The result of 07 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310).
Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B131).
2) End the one-shot command processing.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section represents a probability information command, (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 313 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (B1315). Note that, as error / illegal commands, for example, an illegal occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, a state on command, a magnet illegal notification command (magnetic error command), and a panel radio wave illegal notification command (panel radio error command) are available. is there.
As the fraud occurrence command, there is a command indicating the occurrence of fraudulent winning based on the signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43. The fraud release command is a command indicating the fraud release. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1310), the occurrence of fraudulent winning and the cancellation of fraud are monitored, and the fraud occurrence command and the fraud release command can be transmitted. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error), or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (front frame opening detection switch 64).
There is a command indicating the generation of a signal (main body frame opening error, front frame opening error) from the main body frame opening detection switch). In addition, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred. A status on command and a status off command can be transmitted in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1310). When there is a detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315). When there is a detection (radio wave fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a panel radio wave fraud notification command is transmitted in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316).

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed ().
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the error / invalid setting process, it is set to generate an error or invalid notification sound.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents the out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. Whether or not it is determined (B1319). Then, when the MODE section represents the out ball count command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out ball count reception processing is executed (B1).
320), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball number command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the set value information command (probability set value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery of 1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting value information command, (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the set value reception processing, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a command during probability setting change (A)
There is 1030). Then, when the MODE section represents a setting change type command (B13)
The result of 25 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

When the MODE unit does not represent a setting change system command, the effect control device 300 is (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
There is A1033). Then, when the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1)
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command during probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). And MODE
When the part represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
Next, 00 determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (B13).
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the one-shot command process. In the process of B1332, the game state flag is set to the normal state as an example, but the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit" depending on the timing when this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N".
”) Or when the command in the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is“ N ”).
The effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute a process for a command not shown in FIG. 47 in the one-shot command process. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a time reduction fluctuation number command, an effect rotation speed command, a striking instruction notification command (left-handed instruction notification command, right-handed instruction notification command), and the like from the game control device 100, and receives the command. The processing corresponding to may be performed. The effect control device 300 can acquire the remaining number of fluctuations in the time reduction state from the time reduction variation number command (time reduction variation number), can acquire the effect remaining rotation speed of each effect mode from the effect rotation speed command, and remains in the time reduction state. The effect can be set based on the number of fluctuations of the effect and the remaining number of rotations of the effect in each effect mode. The effect control device 300 indicates a striking method instruction display (left striking instruction display or right striking instruction display) in response to a striking instruction notification command (left striking instruction notification command or right striking instruction notification command). ) Display device 4
It can be displayed (notified) at 1 or the like.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 46) described above will be described. FIG. 48 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information of the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B160).
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 46) described above will be described. FIG. 49 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 is a look-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command).
(B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is being waited for (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) has the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2).
Set the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds (B1703), and acquire the look-ahead variation command MODE section in the sub corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1703).
B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
Acquire a part (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the read-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead fluctuation command area or special figure 2 look-ahead fluctuation command area) corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170).
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Holds vary When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, because there are different types of reach for the same system,
Temporarily, the effect control device 30 does not convert the ACT unit (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command.
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171)
The result of 0 is "N"), and it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B).
The result of 1710 is "Y"), the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead is loaded from the look-ahead variable command area (B1711), and the look-ahead lottery process related to the look-ahead effect of the latest hold is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). When the pre-reading effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (B1715)
The result is "N"), and the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift (when the hold display is moved or when the number of holds is reduced) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the latest hold look-ahead effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the look-ahead variable command process as it is.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 46) described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives a symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2).
Set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE section of the command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT) of the design command.
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to the out-of-order symbol, the jackpot symbol A of the special figure 1, the jackpot symbol BF of the special figure 2, and the jackpot symbol G in the remaining hold (special figure 2 hold).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 46) described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 is a special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undecided (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. When the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, Ends variable command processing.

When the variable system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variable pattern type from the variable system command (variable command) (B1).
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect, which is the effect being changed, is executed (B19).
05). There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 51) described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, effect mode, and setting information (set value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE section of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reserved special figure types. Get the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B2003)
). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is reach fluctuation, the effect control device 300 includes the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode. Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (set value) (B2004), and set the M of the variable command (variable command).
Acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ODE section and the fluctuation pattern type (B2005).

The effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (set value) (B2007), and ACT the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the department is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010).
In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variable effect (B2013) and sets the display of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set, and for example, the display (display of the hold shift) in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016).
). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) includes a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs).
Etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) defined by a decoration number.

It is also possible to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B).
2017), in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate in the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). In addition, it should be noted.
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
, 2 (LED) may be displayed, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the hit command process (B1208) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 46) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect. Is executed (B2102). Further, in response to the big hit fanfare command or the small hit fanfare command, the display (notification) of the striking method instruction (left striking instruction or right striking instruction) may be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 is set to during fanfare (B2103), and the hit-type command process is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds is
It can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round when the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command or a small hit opening command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and is currently Set the game status flag indicating the gaming status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 in the round (B2105, B21).
06), the hit command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107)
When the result of is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10. Set the status flag to the interval (B2108, B2109), and end the hit command processing.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the interval (B2107)
The result is "N"), and the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit system command represents the ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B21
When the result of 10 is "Y"), that is, when the hit command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is executed. Ending is set in the game status flag indicating (P machine status) (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the ending (B2)
The result of 110 is "N"), and the effect control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the first embodiment. The game state is transitioned (shifted) by the game control of the game control device 100. In particular, the game state is shown to be a transition triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, a transition triggered by the passage of a predetermined number of games (rotation speed, number of fluctuations), and the like. In FIG. 54A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special figure probability), the state of the normal figure hit probability (normal figure probability) which is the probability of hitting the normal figure variation display game, the effect mode, and the main Features such as a variable display game (main variable display game, main variable), right-handed or left-handed launch mode are shown.

As described above, the effect mode (effect stage) can be set by the game control device 100 by the jackpot end process (FIG. 30) and the effect mode information check process (FIG. 27). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control device 300 can be set based on the number of time reductions, the specified number of remaining holdings, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit, and the like.

In the first embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state, and a transition state. In the present embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to set the specific game state to a probabilistic state in which the jackpot probability is a high probability state.

In addition, since the jackpot probability and the normal figure hit probability are the same as in the normal game state in the transition state,
Probabilistically, the transition state may be included in the normal gaming state. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal gaming state in which the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game. However, in the transition state, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed due to the remaining hold, and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game. A big hit due to the passage of a game ball (V winning) occurs with a small hit probability (1/8). Therefore, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than usual, and may be regarded as a gaming state that can be distinguished from the normal gaming state from this viewpoint. Further, the transition state and the specific gaming state (time saving state) may be collectively set as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the specific gaming state (time saving state) may be set as the first advantageous state and the transition state may be set as the second advantageous state. It may be in a state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100
The jackpot probability is low (special figure low probability), and the normal figure hit probability is also low (normal figure low probability).
In the present embodiment, a state with a low probability of a normal map is a state without a normal power support (a state without support), and a state with a high probability of a normal figure is a state with a normal power support (a state with support). Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the normal variable winning device 37 (Public train) is opened due to hitting the normal map in the state with support, if the probability of the normal map is low at the time of opening, the state without support is provided. It becomes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which it is considered that there is support while the normal variable winning device 37 is open is also possible.

Further, in the normal game state, the effect mode is the normal mode. In the normal gaming state, left-handed, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36, is more advantageous for the player than right-handed, and is recommended as a mode for launching the game ball. The main starting area where the game ball is likely to win in the recommended firing mode is the first starting winning opening 36, and the main variation display game (main variation special figure) is the special figure 1 variation display game. The sub-starting area in which the game ball is difficult to win in the recommended firing mode is the normal variable winning device 37, and the sub-variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be a low probability state, but the normal figure hit probability to be a high probability (normal figure high probability). In the specific game state, as a mode of launching the game ball, it is recommended that the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened and right-handed aiming at the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is Special Figure 1 This is a variable display game.

In addition, in the specific game state, when the number of time reductions is less than or equal to the reference number of times (5 times in this case) (
There are cases where the number of time reductions ≤ 5) and 99 times, which is larger than the reference number of times (time reduction number = 99). The production mode when the number of time reductions ≤ 5 is the time reduction mode # 1, the production mode when the number of time reductions = 99 is the time reduction mode # 2, and the mode of production of the time reduction mode # 1 and the time reduction mode # 2 is different. You may improve your interest. The reference number of times may be, for example, a value (8 times) that is the reciprocal of the small hit probability 1/8, and may be 7 times or the like. The smaller the reference number of times, the less likely it is that a small hit (a big hit when passing V during a small hit) will occur in the time saving mode # 1, while the production mode # 2
The difference with and becomes large and sharp.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of the specific game state (time saving state). In the transition state, the remaining hold caused by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (Public train) released by hitting the normal figure during the specific game state is exhausted, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. To. The effect mode in the transition state is the remaining hold digestion mode. In addition, the remaining hold digestion mode is changed to the mode before the end of the opening of the normal power by hitting the normal power in the specific game state and the mode after the end of the opening of the normal power after the opening of the normal power is completed. You may divide it. In the pre-opening mode, right-handed aiming at the normal power is recommended, and in the post-opening mode, the left-handed shot is recommended because the normal power is closed.

When the remaining hold digestion mode, which is the effect mode of the transition state, is divided into the mode before the end of the opening of the normal power and the mode after the end of the opening of the normal power, the player can either open the normal power (should hit right) or close it. It becomes easy to understand whether it is (should be left-handed). If it is not divided, it becomes easy to recognize that the remaining hold is being digested through the transition state.

Further, as described above, the transition state and the specific game state (time saving state) may be collectively set as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the same effect mode may be used without dividing the effect mode.
In this case, the advantageous state in which the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game can be set as a common production mode. As will be described later, when a special figure hit occurs due to digestion of the remaining hold (a big hit when passing V during a small hit), the player is more likely to hit the special figure than when a special figure hit occurs during a specific game state. If the game value to be given is increased, a large game value can be obtained even though it is unknown from the common production mode whether the time is shortened or the remaining hold is being digested, and the player can be pleased. .. Here, the game value (privilege) is the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot, the number of jackpots finally obtained, and the like.

Next, the transition from each gaming state will be described. First, in the normal game state, when a big hit (not due to V winning) is generated by the special figure variation display game, the game transitions to the specific game state after the end of the big hit state.

In the specific game state, when a small hit (a big hit state when passing V) occurs due to the special figure variation display game, the game returns to the specific game state again after the end of the big hit state. In this case, returning to the time reduction mode # 1, the number of time reductions as the game value (privilege) is equal to or less than the reference number of times (time reduction number ≤ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the transition state is made from the specific gaming state to the transition state. For example, this predetermined transition condition is that (i) the number of times the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the number of time reductions (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) the special figure variation in the specific game state. The total number of executions of the display game (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game) exceeds the second predetermined number of times (for example, twice the time reduction number), which is larger than the time reduction number (first predetermined number of times). (
iii) The end of the public electric opening of a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is established.

In the specific game state, it is the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 that the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, can be executed a short number of times. If only the number of times exceeding the number of time reductions is set as the transition condition from the specific gaming state, the original specifications of the gaming machine 10 will be deviated from the original specifications of the gaming machine 10 by the amount that the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the slave variation display game, is executed. However, by providing the two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution portion of the follow-up variation display game can be treated as an extra (privilege), and the game can be played with the original specifications without causing any loss to the player. If the player plays normally, the transition state is entered when the condition (i) is satisfied, and it is unlikely that the condition (ii) is satisfied. The reason for setting the condition (iii) will be described later in relation to FIG.

In addition, in the time saving mode # 2 in the specific game state, since it is possible to continue until the special figure 2 variable display game of 99 times of time saving is executed, a small hit (a big hit state is almost certainly generated when passing V) occurs. Then, after the jackpot state ends, the specific game state (time saving mode # 1) is set again. Therefore, the time saving mode # 2 is the next continuous confirmation mode (the next continuous confirmation mode in which the specific game state is surely continued after the jackpot state ends.
Confirmation mode).

In the transition state, when the special figure 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal gaming state of the special figure 1 variation display game. On the other hand, if a small hit (a big hit state is reached by passing V during the small hit) occurs in the transition state, the time saving mode # in the specific game state after the big hit state ends.
The transition to 2 is given 99 times of time saving. That is, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode) in which the remaining hold is digested, the number of time reductions (≦) when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the specific game state. Compared to 5), the number of time reductions is increased, and the game value given to the player is increased. Furthermore, if a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), a small hit (big hit after passing V) will almost certainly occur in the next time saving mode # 2, so a total of two times. The jackpot is secured as a game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54B is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. The transition of the gaming state in FIG. 54B can also be applied in the second embodiment.

In FIG. 54B, all the remaining hold, which is the special figure 2 hold that is digested after the end of the time reduction, is divided into a predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold) and an excess hold (second remaining hold), and an effect corresponding to the transition state is produced. The residual hold digestion mode as a mode is divided into a short-time occurrence residual hold digestion mode in which a predetermined residual hold is digested and an excess hold digestion mode in which the excess hold is digested. Here, the predetermined residual hold is the first predetermined piece (all or part of the special figure 2 hold) that occurs during the time reduction and is digested after the end of the time reduction, and is an excessive hold. Is a special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) that is digested after the predetermined remaining hold. The excess hold digestion mode may include, for example, a mode in which a result screen showing a game result is displayed on the display device 41 and other special modes. It should be noted that the time saving mode and the time saving mode (time saving mode # 1 or time saving mode # 2) are common in that the special figure 2 hold generated during the time saving is digested. It may be common.

[Number of time reductions corresponding to symbols and number of remaining reserves]
FIG. 55 is a table showing the number of time reductions corresponding to the symbol, which is a hit type of the special figure variation display game, and the specified number of remaining holdings (specified number of remaining holdings). The symbol is a hit stop symbol and may correspond to either the stop symbol number or the stop symbol pattern. (A) relates to the winning symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game. The upper figure of (B) is related to the design of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal figure high probability state (in the time saving state), and the lower figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display in the normal figure low probability state. It is related to the winning symbol of the game (the winning symbol in the remaining hold).

The symbol A is a stop symbol determined by a big hit symbol random number, and is a jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbols BF are also stop symbols determined by the jackpot symbol random numbers, but the jackpot related to V passage (V prize) in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game in the high probability state (in the time saving state) of the normal figure. It is a stop symbol of. The symbol G is also a stop symbol determined by the big hit symbol random number, but it is related to V passing (V winning) in the small hit (small hit with the remaining hold) of the special figure 2 variable display game in the low probability state of the normal figure. It is a big hit stop symbol. If there is a small hit symbol random number in addition to the big hit symbol random number, it is also possible to configure the symbols BF and the symbol G as the small hit stop symbol determined by the small hit symbol random number.

The symbol A has a distribution (selection rate) of 100%, and only symbol A exists as a stop symbol for the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbols BF are distributed to the jackpot symbol random numbers at 40%, 25%, 15%, 10%, and 10%, respectively. Design G is 100% sorted
Is.

In symbol A, which is a type of jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is one. Further, in the symbol A, the number of remaining reservations (planned) to be digested after the end of the time saving state is four. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 holds that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends is 5 (= 1 + 4) by default. In symbol A, the continuation rate is {1- (1-1 / 8) ⁵ } × 100% = 48.7% with respect to the small hit probability of 1/8, and the confirmation mode transition rate is (1). -1/8) x {1- (1-1 / 8) ⁴ } x 100% = 36.2%.

In the symbol BF, which is a type of jackpot in the special figure 2 variable display game that started during the high probability state of the normal figure, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 5, 4, 3, 2, 2, and 1 respectively. is there. In addition, symbol B-
In F, the specified number of pending reservations is 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 holds that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is 10 by default in any of the symbols BF. In the symbol BF, the continuation rate is the same for each 1/8 small hit probability, and is {1- (1-1 / 8) ¹⁰ } × 100% = 73.7%, which is confirmed. The mode transition rates are 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3%, respectively.
It will be 61.2%.

In the symbol G, which is a type of big hit (big hit with remaining hold) in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the low probability state of the normal figure, the number of time reductions after the big hit is 99 times. Further, in the symbol G, the specified number of remaining reservations is four. Therefore, the total number of special figure 2 holds that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends is 103. In symbol G, for a small hit probability of 1/8,
In each case, the continuation rate is approximately 100%, and the confirmation mode transition rate is approximately 0%. Therefore, in the symbol G, after the end of the big hit with the remaining hold, the mode shifts to the time saving mode # 2 and the big hit is surely made again, and then the specific game state (time saving state) continues. On the other hand, in symbol G, the confirmation mode transition rate is approximately 0.
%, And most of the flow is from the time saving mode # 2 in the specific game state to the time saving mode # 1 through a big hit.

The continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue by the special figure 2 variable display game (within 5 times for symbol A, within 10 times for symbol BF, and within 103 times for symbol G) after the jackpot state ends. Yes, it is the probability of re-entering the specific gaming state without going through the normal gaming state (normal mode). The fixed mode transition rate is the probability of shifting from the remaining hold digestion mode to the time saving mode # 2 (fixed mode, next continuous confirmed mode) by the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining hold after the jackpot state ends.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of special figure 2 holdes that are consumed after the end of the big hit state (that is, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state), and the total number is 10 symbols BF. The continuation rate in the case of is larger than the continuation rate in the case of the symbol A having a total number of 5. In addition, the fixed mode transition rate increases as the number of time reductions decreases and the specified remaining hold number increases in the order of symbols BF.

As described above, in the symbols BF, the number of time reductions is set according to the symbol which is the type of big hit (type of special result), so that the specific game state after the big hit is set by lottery (distribution). It has a variable number of time reductions (1 to 5) that changes randomly, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, the remaining number of holds (5 to 9), which is the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed after the end of the specific game state, is changed according to the number of time reductions. Therefore, the number of remaining reservations is also random and variable, which is set by lottery, and the fun of the game is improved. In particular, when a difference in game value is provided between the jackpot in a specific game state and the jackpot in the remaining hold, the player will be delighted with the number of remaining holds set in the lottery, and the interest of the game will be improved. ..

Further, regarding the winning symbols BF of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, the total of the time reduction number and the remaining hold number is constant even if the time reduction number and the remaining hold number are variable. Since (10) is set, the confirmation mode transition rate can be made variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. As described above, the same effect is achieved while the special figure 2 variable display game of the total number of the number of time reductions and the remaining number of holdings is executed, that is, in the specific game state (time saving mode) and the transition state (remaining holding digestion mode). When the mode is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving and the remaining hold digestion, and it becomes surprising that a big game value (99 times of time saving number) can be obtained by the big hit with the remaining hold. Is improved.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal operation]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing features and the like of the normal map variation display game and the normal electric operation.

As shown in FIG. 56 (A), there is only one type of hit symbol (hit stop symbol, hit symbol per symbol) in the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the same normal power opening pattern is always used, and the hit state of the normal figure fluctuation display game. In the normal variable winning device 37 (Public train), the normal variable winning device 37 (Public train) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability of hitting a normal figure is 0/251 (0%) in the low probability state and 251/251 (1) in the high probability state.
00%). Randomness is eliminated because the normal map fluctuation display game always hits in the high probability state and always misses in the low probability state. Not limited to this, the probability of hitting a normal figure is a value larger than 0% in a low probability state (normal game state, etc.) (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).
It may be.

The starting memory number (the number of holdings of the normal figure) of the normal figure fluctuation display game is substantially 0, and the normal figure start gate 34 is played during the hit state (during the normal electric operation) and during the fluctuation of the normal figure fluctuation display game. Even if the ball passes, the memory of the normal map start of the normal map variation display game is not memorized. The normal figure fluctuation display game can be started only while the stop symbol is stopped, and when the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 during the stop display, the normal figure start memory is generated, but it is immediately digested and the normal figure change display game. Starts. In this way, since the start memory of the normal map variation display game is not substantially accumulated, the normal map variation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the normal figure fluctuation display game or the normal electric operation and the special figure fluctuation display game can be easily linked without any deviation, and it also leads to prevention of capture.

The fluctuation time of the normal map, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. It should be noted that it may be set to 200 msec in the high probability state of the normal map, and may be longer than 200 msec in the low probability state of the normal map. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In a specific game state (time saving state, normal figure high probability state), in order to link the normal figure fluctuation display game (and thus the normal drawing operation) and the special figure fluctuation display game without deviation, the normal figure fluctuation time and the normal figure stop. The time is preferably as short as possible. Assuming that the rate of fire of the game balls is 100 per minute, the game balls can pass through the normal map start gate 34 every 600 msec, so that the time required for one normal map variation display game, that is, normal The total of the figure fluctuation time and the normal figure stop time is preferably smaller than 600 msec.

Further, the maximum count number (upper limit value of the count number) of Fuden is 10.

FIG. 56B is a diagram showing the configuration of the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 (Public train), and its surroundings. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration for almost all gaming balls hit to the right in accordance with the opening of the pachinko machine (opening of the pachinko machine) passing through the starting gate 34 of the pachinko machine and winning a prize in the pachinko machine.

First, in order to keep the winning rate (the rate at which one game ball wins) to the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting right in accordance with the opening of the normal electric power, the movement of the game ball is unlikely to be uneven. Fig. Obstacle nail 32a and structures are eliminated as much as possible from the game area 32 around the starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37. For example, in the game area 32, the obstacle nail 32a and the structure are not arranged between the normal drawing start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 or on the left and right sides. Obstacle nails 32a, which are arranged substantially directly above the start gate 34, form a passage for the game ball in two rows so that the game ball does not easily leak to the outside. The passage formed by the two rows of obstacle nails 32a is gently connected to the upper passage 32c formed by the structure.

Further, the normal-figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are arranged in a positional relationship so that the game ball that has passed through the normal-figure starting gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as it is. That is, the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged directly below the normal drawing start gate 34. For example, by the time the game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 reaches the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37
The distance L (distance between the centers in the vertical direction) between the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the average falling speed of the game ball and one normal drawing. It may be larger than the product of the time required for the variable display game. However, the distance L is set to a short distance such that even if the falling direction of the game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 deviates from the vertical, the game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37 as it is.

Further, as described above, the normal variable winning device 37 is preferably a so-called tongue type in which the movable member 37b can be rotated so as to tilt forward so that the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is unlikely to be uneven. ..

FIG. 56C shows an opening pattern (general electric opening pattern) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (general electric power) of the present embodiment. The normal power opening pattern shows the operation mode of the normal power by one hit of the normal power. The normal electric opening pattern after the end of the jackpot state is the same regardless of the jackpot symbols AG (that is, the type of jackpot). In addition, the number surrounded by the square frame is the control pointer during normal drawing (Fig. 41).
Etc.).

In the present embodiment, the normal power is opened twice in the normal power opening pattern by one hit of the normal drawing. In addition, the general electric train may be opened a plurality of times of two or more times. The opening of the normal power is divided into the first half opening and the second half opening with a long interval in which the normal power is closed. The general electric interval time (wait time), which is the interval time, is 60,000 msec, and the general electric open time of both the first half open and the second half open is 3000 msec.

For example, if the rate of fire of the game balls is 100 per minute, the game balls reach the Fuden every 600 msec, so it is possible to win the Fuden five times during the first half opening of 3000 msec, and 60,000 msec. 5 during the second half opening of 3000 msec after the interval of
It is possible to win a prize in the Kaifuden. The special figure 2 hold accumulated during the first half opening can be digested during the interval of 60,000 msec when the normal power is closed, and the number of special figure 2 hold can be reduced to 0, and the maximum during the subsequent second half opening. Limited number of special figure 2 holds (4 in this case) can be saved.

During the interval of the normal train (in the closed state), when the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state reaches the time reduction number, the specific game state (time reduction state, normal figure high probability state, support state) is set. It ends and becomes a low probability state (transition state). Then, the special figure 2 hold that was saved during the first half opening but is consumed after the end of the time saving state is left on hold, and in addition, the special figure 2 hold that is saved by winning a prize in the Fuden during the second half opening of 3000 msec is also left on hold. It becomes. In this way, even if the probability of the normal figure is low, a large amount of remaining hold can be accumulated by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving one normal figure hit (specific result) of the normal figure fluctuation display game, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can be converted to the open state a plurality of times, and the normal figure fluctuation display game can be played. The normal variable winning device 37 can be converted into an open state in both a high probability state in which the probability of hitting a normal figure is high and a low probability state in which the probability of hitting a normal figure is low. Therefore, even if the probability of hitting a normal figure is low, the normal variable winning device 37 can be converted to the open state and the special figure 2 hold can be stored, so that the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved. To do.

Further, when the first half of the Fuden is opened, the special figure 2 hold can be stored and digested at intervals, and when the second half of the Fuden is opened, the special figure 2 hold can be stored again and digested after the Fuden operation is completed.
Therefore, the number of remaining holds can be made larger than the upper limit of 4 which is the upper limit of the number of holds in FIG. 2, and the number of remaining holds can also be made variable by changing the number of time reductions.

〔Timing chart〕
FIGS. 57-59 show the game state, the probability of the normal figure (probability of hitting the normal figure), the state of the normal figure, the state of the normal electric power, the number of reserved special figures 2 and the game of displaying the special figure variation (variable special figure), etc. It is a timing chart showing. The time elapses toward the right side of the timing chart. 57 is after the jackpot of symbol A, FIG. 58 is after the jackpot of symbol B, and FIG. 59 is.
It is related to after the big hit of the symbol F.

As for the state after the big hit of the symbols BF, the timing of changing from the normal figure high probability state (specific game state) to the normal figure low probability state is different only because the number of time reductions and the specified remaining hold number are different. , Only symbol B and symbol F are illustrated. 2 of game status and normal probability
The appearances other than one are common to all of the symbols BF.

Further, FIGS. 57-59 show the passage of the game ball through the normal figure start gate 34 (normal figure gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the winning of the game ball into the normal variable winning device 37 (Public train) (starting). Mouth 2
(Detection of switch 37a) is also indicated by a pulse. In FIGS. 57-59, the passage of the game ball at the Fuzu gate, the Fuzu state, the Fuden state, and the state and changes of the Fuden prize (winning to the Fuden) are the same, and the description thereof is omitted as appropriate. ..

In FIGS. 57-59, the jackpot round (during jackpot) and the jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending where the ending effect is executed, when the player makes a right-handed strike, such as when prompted by a right-handed instruction display, the game ball passes through the normal-figure start gate 34 (the normal-figure gate) (the beginning of FIG. 57). (Indicated by the pulse of), the normal figure (ordinary symbol) fluctuates on the normal figure display 53, the normal figure variation display game is executed, and then the game is stopped. Here, since the normal map is in a low probability state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, it stops off.

Here, when the normal figure comes off and stops, the jackpot ending ends, and the normal figure probability becomes a high probability state, and in response to the specific game state (time saving mode # 1) of FIG. 54A, the right-handed state with support become. At the beginning of the right-handed state with support (high probability state of the normal figure), the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34, and the fluctuation of the normal figure starts. Then, since it is in a high probability state with a probability of 100%, the normal power operation starts when the normal figure hits, and the normal power is released as the first half is opened. In the open state where the Fuden is open, the game ball that has passed through the Fuzu start gate 34 wins the Fuden as it is (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special figure 2 hold occurs, the special figure 2 hold is exhausted, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special figure 2 hold becomes 0.

As described above, the game control device 100 has a variation time (execution time) of the special figure 2 variation display game.
And the stop display time are controlled based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 from the end of the jackpot state (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game) (variation start information setting process in FIG. 23 and special figure variation in FIG. 24). Medium processing). The game control device 100 differs in the fluctuation time and the stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in three types: after the jackpot of symbol A ends, after the jackpot of symbols BF ends, and after the jackpot of symbol G ends. To set.

After the big hit of symbol A in FIG. 57, the fluctuation time is set sufficiently long so that the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game continues at least until the end of the normal electric operation, that is, the end of the latter half opening. The fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the normal operation time (660) in FIG. 57.
It is substantially the same as 00 msec (66 seconds), but a margin (several seconds to a dozen seconds) may be added to the normal electric operation time. In this way, in response to the normal electric operation including the two open states (together)
The first special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and four special figure 2 hold, which is the upper limit value, is accumulated during the execution of this special figure 2 variable display game.

Since the number of time reductions after the jackpot of symbol A is one, when the first special figure 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends, the normal figure low probability state is set, and the transition state (transition state). Transition to the residual hold digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 hold that has been accumulated as the remaining hold is executed four times in a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2nd to 5th times). Special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

After the big hit of symbol B in FIG. 58, the first special figure 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the first half opening of the normal train and continues until the end. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is substantially the same as the normal power opening time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 58, but the details of the fluctuation time will be described in relation to FIG. 62. .. Corresponding to the opening of the first half of the Fuden (together), the first special figure 2 variable display game is running, and during the execution of this special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit of 4 pieces. Can be saved. All of the 4 special figure 2 holds are exhausted during the interval when the electric power is closed, and during the interval, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed 4 times with a fluctuation time considerably shorter than the first time (2). ~ 5th special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

Since the number of time reductions after the jackpot of symbol B is 5, when the fifth special figure 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends, the normal figure low probability state is set, and the transition state (transition state). Transition to the residual hold digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the normal train is released as the second half opening. As soon as one special figure 2 hold occurs as a remaining hold due to winning a prize in the open state, the special figure 2 hold is exhausted, the sixth special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special figure 2 holds is It becomes 0.

Corresponding to the opening of the second half of the Fuden (together), the 6th special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit of 4 pieces. Can be saved. 6
The second special figure 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the second half of the Fuden and continues until the end. The fluctuation time of the 6th special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the normal power opening time (30) in FIG. 58.
It is substantially the same as 00 msec (3 seconds), but the details will be described in relation to FIG. 62.

After the 6th special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 hold, which is stored as 4 remaining holds, is executed 4 times in a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the 1st and 6th times ( 7-1
The 0th special figure 2 variable display game). In this way, it is possible to realize the 5 specified remaining hold numbers corresponding to the 6th to 10th special figure 2 variable display games.

The 7th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games may all have the same fixed short fluctuation time, and the fluctuation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 fluctuation display games (particularly the fluctuation time during the time saving state). A fixed variation time equal to or shorter than is sufficient. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed with the same rhythm at a good tempo, and the remaining hold can be quickly exhausted. Since the 7th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games have nothing to do with saving only by digesting the special figure 2 hold, the variable fluctuation time is set to be selected by the distribution of fluctuation patterns (lottery). Then, the game is not monotonous. In addition, the fluctuation time of the 7th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games is made longer than the fluctuation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 fluctuation display games (particularly the fluctuation time during the time saving state), and the response is made slowly. It is also possible to produce a production.

In addition, when the opening of the second half of the Fuden is completed, the Fuzu hit state ends, and the Fuzu start gate 34 (
The normal map variation display game can be executed by passing the game ball of the normal map gate), but since the normal map variation display game is in a low probability state with a probability of 0% per normal map, no result is produced in the normal map variation display game. It should be noted that the stop after the end of the normal figure hit state corresponds to the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal figure ending time.

After the big hit of the symbol F in FIG. 59, the passing of the game ball of the normal figure gate, the normal figure state, the normal electric state, the general electric prize, the special figure 2 hold number, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation). The appearance and changes are the same as after the jackpot of symbol B in FIG. 58. However, the timing of changing from the specific game state (normal figure high probability state) to the transition state (normal figure low probability state, remaining hold digestion mode) differs because the number of time reductions and the specified remaining hold number differ between symbol B and symbol F. ..

After the big hit of symbol F, when the first special figure 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time saving mode) ends, the normal figure low probability state is set, and the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode) is entered. .. After that, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed 9 times as in the case after the big hit of the symbol B, and 9 specified remaining hold numbers can be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time corresponding to the open state of the normal electric power, and corresponds to the closed state (interval) of the general electric power. 2 The variable display game can be executed in a short time. Therefore, when the first half of the Fuden is opened, the special figure 2 hold can be stored and digested at intervals, and when the second half of the Fuden is opened, the special figure 2 hold can be stored again and digested after the Fuden operation is completed. Therefore, the number of remaining holds can be made larger than the upper limit of the number of holds held in FIG. 2, and the number of remaining holds can also be made variable by changing the number of time reductions.

Although not shown after the big hit of the symbol G, for example, the special figure 2 variable display game is a short fixed game such as the 2nd to 5th times and the 7th to 10th times of FIGS. 57-59 while repeating the normal electric operation. It may be executed only for the number of time reductions (99 times) and the remaining hold amount (4 pieces) in the variable time. Design G
If the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game after the big hit is fixed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if there is no fixed and the variable time is variable, the game is not monotonous.

[Countermeasures against deviation]
Here, as a countermeasure against the difference between the start timing of the normal power release (normal power operation) and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state, about the appropriate time value for the special figure 2 variable display game and the normal power operation. consider.

60 and 61 are time charts showing Examples 1 and 2 in which the start timing of the opening of the normal electric power and the start timing of the special FIG. 2 variable display game are different from each other. Note that FIGS. 60 and 61 are shown in FIG.
Corresponding to No. 8, the state after the big hit of the symbol B (the number of time reductions is 5 times and the specified number of remaining holdings is 5) is shown.

In FIG. 60, when the game ball of the normal figure start gate 34 (normal figure gate) passes at the big hit ending (big hit state) before the specific game state and the normal figure variation display game (outside variation) starts, the normal figure changes. The display game may have a longer fluctuation time than the time saving state. In this case, even if the next game ball passes through the Fuzu gate in the specific game state, the Fuzu variation display game cannot be started, and the Fuzu variation finally occurs when the next game ball passes through the Fuzu gate. When the display game (hit fluctuation) starts and the start timing of opening the normal power is shifted later than the case where it is started immediately after the big hit ending (FIG. 58) (displacement <1>).

Further, in FIG. 60, in the case of continuous chan where big hits are repeated, the special figure 2 hold before the big hit state is carried over after the big hit state, and when the big hit state ends, the special figure 2 changes immediately without waiting for the opening of the normal train. The display game starts. Then, the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game is shifted earlier than the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the normal power is opened (shift <2>).

If the deviation <1> and the deviation <2> occur at the same time, it will be 1 with respect to the start timing of opening the normal power.
Special figure 2 of the second time The start timing of the variable display game is greatly deviated forward (previous deviation). Then, as shown in FIG. 60, the 6th long-time special figure 2 variable display game also deviates greatly forward from the opening of the second half of the normal train, and the 7th and 8th special figure 2 variable display games are played during the latter half opening. It has started, and during the opening of the second half, more prizes are generated in the regular train than in FIG. 58, and one extra special figure 2 hold occurs. Therefore, the actual number of remaining holdings is 6, which is one more than the specified number of remaining holdings of 5.

In FIG. 61, if the special figure 1 hold that occurred during or before the big hit state is carried over after the big hit state and there is no special figure 2 hold at the end of the big hit state (special figure 2 hold number = 0), the big hit state. The special figure 1 variable display game is started immediately at the end of, and the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game is shifted later than the case where the game is started immediately after the opening of the normal train (FIG. 58).

That is, the start timing of the first special figure 2 variable display game is greatly deviated later than the start timing of the opening of the normal electric power (rear deviation). Then, as shown in FIG. 61, 5 during the latter half opening.
Along with the execution of the 6th special figure 2 variable display game, the 6th long-time special figure 2 variable display game is significantly shifted after the start of the second half opening of the Fuden, and the special figure 2 hold that accumulates during the second half opening is held. 3
Only 4 to 1 are accumulated and 4 to 1 are insufficient. Therefore, the actual number of remaining holdings is 4, which is one less than the specified number of remaining holdings of 5.

In particular, unlike the special figure 2 hold priority digestion (special figure 2 priority change) of the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 hold priority digestion, the start timing of the first special figure 2 change display game is greatly deviated later. It will occur.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a shift countermeasure that prevents excess or deficiency of the special figure 2 hold due to the above-mentioned front shift and rear shift and eliminates the difference between the actual remaining hold number and the specified remaining hold number. FIG. 62 also shows FIG. 58.
Corresponding to, the state after the big hit of the symbol B (the number of times of shortening the time is 5 times and the specified number of remaining holdings is 5) is shown.

As a measure against deviation, the fluctuation time Ta of the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a value obtained by adding a margin (several seconds to a dozen seconds) to the first half of the normal power opening time. In addition, the general electric interval time Tb,
Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display Set the value by adding a margin (several seconds to a dozen seconds) to the time required for the game to fluctuate four times with a short fixed fluctuation time. For example, the time required to fluctuate four times is (fixed fluctuation time + fixed stop display time) × 4. Further, the fluctuation time Tc of the sixth special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to a value larger than the normal power opening time in the latter half.

FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 are time charts showing the effect (effect 1) on the front deviation and the effect (effect 2) on the rear deviation of the deviation countermeasure, respectively.

In FIG. 63, even if the opening of the first half of the normal train is delayed from the first special figure 2 variable display game due to the front deviation of the first special figure 2 variable display game, the variable time of the first special figure 2 variable display game Ta
However, since it is longer by the margin (several seconds to a dozen seconds) than the opening time of the first half of the electric power (3000 msec, 3 seconds), the delay of opening the first half of the ordinary electric power can be absorbed. That is, special figure 2 before the big hit state
Due to the carry-over of the hold, the first half of the Fuden is opened while the first special figure 2 variable display game starts immediately after the end of the jackpot state and continues for a long time.

Further, during the normal electric interval time Tb, which is the closed period of the general electric power, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed four times or more with a short fixed variable time. For this reason, the special figure 2 hold will always be 0 by the time the second half opening of the Fuden starts, and the winning of the first Fuden in the second half opening will be the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. The effect of the delay in opening the first half of is eliminated.

Furthermore, in order to make the fluctuation time Tc of the 6th special figure 2 fluctuation display game larger than the normal power opening time in the latter half, the special figure 2 hold is accumulated up to the upper limit of 4, and the actual remaining during the latter half opening. It is possible to suppress the difference between the number of holds and the specified number of remaining holds.

In FIG. 64, even if the first special figure 2 variable display game is delayed with respect to the opening of the first half of the normal power due to the rear shift, it can be absorbed during the long normal power interval time Tb. For this reason, by the time the second half of the Fuden opens, the number of special figures 2 held will always be 0, and the first prize for the second half of the Fuden will be the special figure 2.
Since the variable display game is started, the influence of the delay of the first special figure 2 variable display game is eliminated.

As another countermeasure against the rearward deviation, since the rearward deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game is caused by the special figure 1 variable display game executed in the specific gaming state, the time value of the special figure 1 variable display game ( (Fluctuation time and stop display time) may be changed to an ultra-short fluctuation so that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can always be started while the first half of the normal train is open. As the variation in the ultra-short time, unlike FIG. 64, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game may be further shorter than the short fixed variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state.

Further, in the first place, in the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 hold priority digestion (special figure 2 priority change) is performed, so that in the specific gaming state. Since the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is about once at most, the special figure 2 hold priority digestion itself is a countermeasure against the back shift.

[Countermeasures against stopping]
FIG. 65 is a time chart illustrating a method of increasing the actual remaining hold from the specified remaining hold number by stopping. FIG. 65 corresponds to FIG. 58 and shows the state after the big hit of the symbol B (the number of time reductions is 5 times and the specified remaining number of holdings is 5).

In FIG. 64, during the opening of the first half of the Fuden, only four Fuden are awarded by stopping, and a maximum of five are not awarded. That is, during the opening of the first half of the Fuden, only four special figures 2 hold were generated.
Do not generate up to the maximum (5 pieces corresponding to the specified number of time reductions). Therefore, the fifth rotation of the specified time reduction number does not start, and unlike FIGS. 58 and 62, the probability of hitting a normal figure does not drop to a low probability during the interval of the normal electric train.

Due to the second Fuden operation (per hit the second Fuden), the fifth special figure 2 while the first half of the Fuden is open.
The variable display game has started, and finally the normal figure low probability state is reached, but since the normal electric is already operating, the normal electric operation can be continued until the latter half of the opening, and the special figure 2 hold can be further generated. In this way, the high-probability state of Fuzu is extended by stopping, and Fuden operates twice, so the number of remaining hold is several (
Here, 4) can be increased.

FIG. 66 is a time chart illustrating measures against stoppage. Game control device 100
Is when the latter half opening in one normal power operation is completed (when the normal power operation is finished), that is, when the specified number of times (twice) of the open state of the normal power is finished in the specific game state. End the specific game state. For example, the processing of the remaining spheres of the normal power (FIG. 42) or the processing of the end per normal drawing (FIG. 43)
), The game control device 100 can end the specific game state when the latter half opening is completed by providing the processing step of setting the time reduction variation number to 0.

This corresponds to the transition condition (iii) for transitioning from the specific gaming state to the transition state, which was described above in relation to FIG. 54A, and when the transition condition (iii) is satisfied, the specific gaming state (time saving mode) is entered. After the end, the transition state (remaining hold mode) is entered. If there is no special figure 2 hold when ending the specific game state by the end of the latter half opening, the transition state (remaining hold mode) is skipped and the state shifts to the normal game state (normal mode) of FIG. 54A.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 65, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 has not reached the number of time reductions (5 times in this case), but it is usually triggered by the end of one normal operation (end of opening in the second half). Since the probability of hitting the figure has dropped to a low probability, there is no hit of the second normal figure and there is no second normal electric operation. For this reason, the advantage of stopping is lost, and the player does not stop.

As another stop, if the special figure 2 hold before the big hit state is carried over after the big hit state, the remaining hold may increase unless the game ball is launched until all the special figure 2 hold is exhausted. .. As a countermeasure for this, it is possible to start the special figure 2 variable display game after detecting the game ball with the gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34 after the jackpot state ends.

[How to hit instruction display]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a striking instruction display that suggests (instructs) a player how to launch a game ball in the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 67, the mode of the striking instruction display may be changed stepwise. In particular, although FIG. 67 shows how the mode of the right-handed instruction display changes stepwise, the left-handed instruction display may be changed stepwise in the same manner.

In FIG. 67, during the big hit (during the big hit round) and during the opening of the public electric power, the large winning opening (special variable winning device) and the general electric power (ordinary variable winning device 37) are opened, so that the player can make a right-handed profit. There is. Therefore, during the big hit (during the big hit round) and during the opening of the general electric power, the effect control device 3
00 is displayed in a large manner so that the right-handed instruction display is conspicuous. However, during the other big hit endings and the interval of the general train (in the closed state), there is not much profit to hit right even in the right-handed state, and it is not always necessary to shoot the game ball by right-handed. Therefore, during the jackpot ending or the interval of the general electric power, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display in an inconspicuous and small manner.

Immediately before the opening of the first half and the opening of the second half of the Fuden, the effect control device 300 gradually changes the mode of the right-handed instruction display, which was displayed in a small size so as not to be conspicuous, to start the opening of the first half and open the second half. Indicate in a large manner prominently at or immediately after the start of. As a result, the player can start launching the right-handed game ball from before the first half opening to prepare for the first half opening, and at the same time, the player can start launching the right-handed game ball from before the second half opening to prepare for the second half opening. Launch can be started. Therefore, in the first half opening and the second half opening of the Fuden, it is possible to accumulate the specified number of special figure 2 holds by repeatedly winning the Fuden, and to achieve the specified remaining number of holds.

FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a stepwise change in the striking instruction display (here, the right striking instruction display).

(A) is the same as the stepwise change shown in FIG. 67, but as shown by the solid line arrow, the right-handed instruction display in the shape of an arrow changes from a small mode that is inconspicuous to a stepwise (three steps). It becomes a conspicuous large aspect. On the contrary, as shown by the dotted arrow, the mode may change from a conspicuous large mode to a stepwise (three stages) to become an inconspicuous small mode immediately before the jackpot ending or just before the interval of the normal train.

In (B), as shown by the solid arrow, the right-handed instruction display is partially (gradually) colored in red or the like in multiple stages (3 stages) from an inconspicuous white mode, and as a whole. It becomes a colored and conspicuous aspect. On the contrary, as shown by the dotted arrow, just before the big hit ending or just before the interval of the normal train, the overall colored conspicuous mode changes to a stepwise (3 steps) and inconspicuous white mode. You may become.

In (C), as shown by the solid arrow, the right-handed instruction display changes from an inconspicuous white (white) mode to a stepwise (three-step) conspicuous color, from blue to yellow, and then to a conspicuous red. It becomes an aspect. The color may change from a light color (low saturation state) to a dark color (high saturation state), or from a dark color (low lightness state) to a bright color (high lightness state). May change. On the contrary, as shown by the dotted arrow, immediately before the big hit ending or just before the interval of the normal train, the red mode changes from a conspicuous red mode to a white (white) mode that does not stand out in stages (3 stages). May be good.

[Example of screen transition]
69A to 69D are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the first embodiment. The effect on the display device 41 is controlled by the effect control device 300. Note that FIG. 69 corresponds to FIG. 58 (after the big hit with symbol B).

In (a), the jackpot round effect is executed in the final jackpot round (10R) during the jackpot. Since there is a benefit of right-handed hitting, the arrow-shaped right-handed hitting instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuous large mode.

Subsequently, in (a), the jackpot ending effect is executed in the jackpot ending after the final jackpot round. Since there is not much profit to hit right even in the right-handed state, the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in an inconspicuous small mode.

Next, in (c), in the time saving state after the big hit ending, it is the state before the start of the special figure variation display game. The production mode is the time saving mode # 1. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are respectively designated with the number "0" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. The indicated number "0" is displayed. Since the right-handed state with support (high probability state in the normal figure) and the normal power is released immediately, the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuous large mode. As described above, the mode of the right-handed instruction display 551, which has been displayed small, may be changed stepwise to a larger mode.

The game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34 and the fluctuation of the normal map starts, but since it is in a high probability state with a probability of 100%, the normal map hits and the normal electric operation starts, and the first half is open (the first half). Open to the public)
As a result, the public train will be released.

Then, in (d), the game ball that has passed through the Fuzu start gate 34 in the open state of the Fuden wins the Fuden as it is, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started. Decoration Special Figure 2 The effect corresponding to the time saving mode # 1 is set by the variation effect setting process (FIG. 52) at the start of the variation display game.

Then, as identification information, the fluctuation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) fluctuates. Display area 61
When it is 0, it is being executed, and as identification information, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 615. In the left region 610A, right region 610B, and middle region 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol (decorative first symbol A), the right symbol (decorative first symbol B), and the middle symbol (decorative first symbol C) are respectively. It is fluctuating. Each decorative special symbol (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) is composed of a square frame (frame image) and a number (numerical image), but may be a character (character image) instead of the square frame. Within the frame, the color of the numbers is different from the color of the parts other than the numbers. Also, in (d), each decorative special symbol is fluctuating at a high moving speed (during high-speed fluctuating), but the frame image (or character image) is hidden (deleted) and only the numbers fluctuate. You can. In addition, each decorative special symbol may be displayed semi-transparently and lightly during high-speed fluctuation.

Variable display In the second hold display unit 530b (standby area) that displays the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the game is executed as the second hold display, the hold display 533 is displayed by winning a prize in the Fuden.
(2nd hold display) is displayed momentarily, but immediately the hold digestion area 540 of the square frame on the left side
Move to (hold shift). In the hold digestion area 540, the change hold display 533b indicating the change hold (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure change display game) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed. The first hold display unit 530a for displaying the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) as the first hold display (first start memory display) is not displayed here.

After that, in (e), while the first half of the Fuden was open, the special figure 2 hold was generated one after another due to the winning of the Fuden, and the hold display 533 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold was displayed one after another on the second hold display unit 530b. Is displayed in. Then, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are displayed, respectively.
The number "0" indicating the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 and the number "3" indicating the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 are displayed. In addition, the enemy character 554 (tadpole) that will be competing in the later battle production (battle production) will appear, and the ally character 557 will also appear. As a dialogue effect, the dialogue "game" of the enemy character 554 is displayed in characters, and the dialogue "hold increase" of the ally character 557 is displayed in characters corresponding to the increase in the special figure 2 hold. The dialogue may be output from the speaker as voice.

Then, in (f), the line "filling completed" of the ally character 557 is displayed in characters corresponding to the fact that four pieces of the special figure 2 hold, which is the upper limit value, have been accumulated. Special figure 2 Hold number display unit 660
Is displayed with the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special figures 2.

Next, in (G), the first half opening (the first half of the normal power opening) is completed, and the first special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is completed, and the out-of-order stop symbol "1,8,2" is completed. Is displayed in the variable display areas 610 and 615. Since it is during the interval of the normal electric power (in the closed state), there is not much profit of right-handed even in the right-handed state, and the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in an inconspicuous small mode.

Further, here, as a look-ahead effect (hold change notice), the hold display 533 in the normal mode is changed to a mode (character) indicating the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit in the variable display game held in Special Figure 2, and the hold display 533d-. It will be 533 g. For example, the magnitude of the expectation of the character is displayed on hold 5
33e> Hold display 533d> Hold display 533g> Hold display 533f.

After that, in (h), the special figure 2 hold of the hold display 533d is exhausted, and the second special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state has a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first special figure 2 variable display game. It is executed during the interval of the game. In addition, the number "3" indicating the number of special figures 2 held is displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660. Further, the second hold display unit 530b has moved to the upper right side, but the hold display 533d has disappeared.

In the hold digestion region 540, the variable hold display 533b corresponding to the hold display 533d is displayed. The variable hold display 533b (▽) is different from the hold display 533 that imitates a character, but may be the same mode. In a different aspect, the variable hold display 533b is easy to display in the narrow hold digestion area 540, and in the same mode, the hold display 533 on standby (before digestion) is displayed.
And the variable pending display 533b during digestion are easy to understand.

In the center of the screen, the character on hold display 533d becomes the ally character 557.
Attack the enemy character 554 (acting on the enemy character 554) as a battle production,
A beam is radiated to the enemy character 554. The enemy character 554 that appears during the interval of the Fuden appears in (e) and (f) during the first half of the Fuden, and the continuity of the production is maintained. Instead of becoming the character 557, the hold display 533d imitating the character may directly act on the enemy character 554 to play against it. In this case, in (c), the reserved digestion region 540 and the variable pending display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (chi) described later).

After that, in (ke), the third special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is executed during the interval of the normal train with a short variable time after the end of the second special figure 2 variable display game. In the hold digestion region 540, the variable hold display 533b corresponding to the hold display 533e is displayed. In addition, the number "2" indicating the number of special figures 2 held is displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660. Further, the hold display 533e has disappeared from the second hold display unit 530b.

On the screen, the character on hold display 533e becomes the sub-character 558a (helper character, auxiliary character) that supports the ally character 557, and the enemy character 5
Participate in 54 attacks and beam with friendly character 557 (main character)
Light rays, effects) are radiated to the enemy character 554. In addition, when participating in the attack, the mode of the beam of the sub-character 558a can be recognized as participating in the attack.
It is different from the beam mode of the ally character 557. The sub-character 558a
Instead of becoming, the hold display 533e that imitates the character is directly the enemy character 55
You may play against 4 (hereinafter, the same applies to the hold display 533f, 533g).
In this case, in (K) to (S), the reserved digestion region 540 and the variable pending display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (T) to (G) described later).

Further, the character of the hold display 533 on the second hold display unit 530b and the sub character 5
The 58 is displayed, for example, in a smaller size, in monochrome, or in a light color so as to be less noticeable than the character 557, which is the main character. This makes it easier to recognize which character is the main character.

Subsequently, in (ko), the fourth special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is executed during the interval of the normal train with a short variable time after the end of the third special figure 2 variable display game. .. In the hold digestion region 540, the variable hold display 533b corresponding to the hold display 533f is displayed. In addition, the number "1" indicating the number of special figures 2 held is displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660. Further, the hold display 533f has disappeared from the second hold display unit 530b.

On the screen, the character on hold display 533f becomes a sub-character 558b that supports the ally character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and beams together with the ally character 557 (main character) and the sub-character 558a. A ray of light) is radiated to the enemy character 554.

Subsequently, in (sa), the fifth special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the jackpot state is executed during the interval of the normal train with a short variable time after the end of the fourth special figure 2 variable display game. .. In the reserved digestion region 540, the variable pending display 533b corresponding to the reserved display 533 g is displayed. In addition, the number "0" indicating the number of special figures 2 held is displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660. Further, the hold display 533 g has disappeared from the second hold display unit 530b.

On the screen, the character with the hold display 533g becomes the sub-character 558c that supports the ally character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and together with the ally character 557 (main character) and the sub-characters 558a and 558b. A beam is emitted to the enemy character 554.

Next, in (shi), the fifth special figure 2 variation display game after the end of the jackpot state is completed, and the missed stop symbols "7, 2, 3" are displayed in the variation display areas 610 and 615. Further, as a result, the time saving state (time saving mode # 1) is terminated, and the transition state (normally low probability state) in which the remaining hold can be digested is reached. After that, the second half opening (the second half of the public power opening) starts and the public power is released.

Subsequently, in (S), the game ball that has passed through the Fuzu start gate 34 in the open state of the Fuden wins the Fuden as it is, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started. Here, it is a right-handed state without support (a low-probability state in the normal figure), but since the normal power is released as the latter half opening, the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuous large mode. As described above, the mode of the right-handed instruction display 551, which has been displayed small, may be changed stepwise to a larger mode.

Here, since there is a possibility that the player may not be able to recognize that the normal power is open due to the end of the high-probability normal time saving state, the game board 30 is accompanied by the characters "Aim for the normal power". You may display the ordinary electric position image 561 which shows typically the position of the ordinary electric power in.

In the following (s) to (na), the remaining hold is exhausted in the transition state after the end of the time saving state, so that the special figure 2 variable display game from the 6th to the 10th after the end of the big hit state is executed. Show how it is done. In FIGS. 69C and 69D, from (S) to (N) in the transition state.
Then, as described above, assuming that the advantageous state favorable to the player continues from the time saving state, the same effect mode (common effect mode) as the time saving mode # 1 in the time saving state is set. Therefore, from (s) to (na), the same effects as (d) to (shi) are executed.

That is, from (S) to (S) during the second half of the Fuden, the effect of accumulating four special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) is executed in response to the sixth special figure 2 variable display game, and the second half opening ends. From (ta) later (
In na), while the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variable display games are executed, the battle effect corresponding to each special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

When the time saving state and the transition state are set to the same production mode in this way, it is difficult to recognize whether the time saving state or the remaining holding is being digested in a common production mode. A big game value may be obtained by hitting, and the player can be pleased.

An example of switching from the time saving mode # 1 in the time saving state to another residual holding digestion mode in the transition state will be described later in FIGS. 69E and 69F.

From (S) to (S), the opening of the second half of the Fuden (the opening of the Fuden in the second half) is maintained, and 6
The second special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure 2 hold is increased as the remaining hold. afterwards,
From (ta) to (na), the four special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) accumulated in the second half opening are 1 from the 7th time.
It is digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game up to the 0th time. After (na), the normal game state is set, and the effect mode also changes to the normal mode.

The enemy characters 554 that appear after the start of the second half of the Fuden are those that appeared in the time saving state (d) to (shi), and the continuity of the production with the time saving mode # 1 is maintained. .. In addition, (su) to (na) have the same effect corresponding to (d) to (shi), but (se)
The lines of the enemy character 554 and the ally character 557 (main character) in
The character of the hold display 533 and the like may be different from the time saving mode # 1. In addition, after (ta), the right-handed state changes to the left-handed state at the end of the second half opening, and the left-handed instruction display 552.
Is displayed in a small, inconspicuous manner. In addition, while the special figure 2 hold is being digested as shown in (ta) to (g), a striking instruction display (here, left striking instruction display 552) is displayed to prevent the player from being confused. Instead, the hitting instruction display may be displayed after (na) when the special figure 2 hold is completely exhausted and the special figure 1 variable display game can be started.

In addition, (d) to (ne) indicate the case where the eighth special figure 2 variable display game of (tsu) becomes a small hit (big hit after passing V) or a big hit, and (d) becomes SP reach and movie production. Is executed. In the movie, the enemy character 554 (tadpole) may explode and disappear.

Further, in (d), the left-handed instruction display 552 is changed from a conspicuous color (red) to an inconspicuous color (blue) so as not to interfere with the movie production or the like. Also, in (d), hold display 5
The aspect of 33 g may be returned to the original aspect (▽). Further, in (d), the hold display 533, the hold digestion area 540, and the changing hold display 533b may be hidden so as not to interfere with the movie production or the like.

Subsequently, in (nu), the stop symbol of the small hit or the big hit is displayed, and in (ne), the fanfare effect of the small hit or the big hit is executed.

As described above, an example of the effect of the display device 41 after the big hit of the symbol B has been described with reference to FIGS. 69A-D. )
The same effect as in FIGS. 69A-D is executed only before. For example, after the big hit of the symbol F, the time saving state ends at the time (g).

In addition, after the big hit of symbol A, the effect of accumulating the special figure 2 hold from (d) to (f) is executed until the end of the second half opening of the normal train (the end of the normal train operation), and from (ki) to (so). It is sufficient to omit the production up to and execute the production after (ta) after the end of the second half opening. Further, after the big hit of the symbol G, for example, the productions (d) to (sa) may be repeated until the end of the time saving state.

[Another example of screen transition]
69E and 69F are alternative examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the first embodiment. (S 1) to (Ne 1) in FIGS. 69E and 69F are the above-mentioned replacements of (S) to (Ne) in FIGS. 69C and 69D. This alternative example also corresponds to FIG. 58 (after the big hit of symbol B).

In the transition state (S1) to (Na1), unlike the above-mentioned (S) to (Na), after the end of the time saving state, the effect mode is different from the time saving mode # 1 in the time saving state. Figure 5
It changes to 4A). As shown by hatching, in the residual hold digestion mode, the screen background may be different from that of the time saving mode # 1 in relation to the change in the effect mode. Therefore, from (Su 1) to (Na 1)
Then, an effect different from (d) to (shi) is executed.

From (Su 1) to (So 1), the second half of the Fuden (the second half of the Fuden is open) is maintained, the sixth special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure 2 hold is held as the remaining hold. To increase. The enemy character 554 has changed from the character (tadpole) in the time saving mode # 1 (c) to another character (UFO) from (c) to (sa) in relation to the change in the effect mode.
Others are the same as (S) to (S).

After that, from (Ta 1) to (Na 1), the four special figures 2 held in the second half opening (remaining hold)
Is digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game from the 7th to the 10th time. In addition, (
After 1), it will be in the normal game state, and the production mode will also change to the normal mode.

In (ta 1) to (na 1), the hold display 533d-53 in the second hold display unit 530b.
3g is displayed in a manner imitating a bullet, unlike (ta) to (na). Then, the friendly character 557 displayed in (Su 1) to (So 1) gets into the tank character 563, which is another friendly character, and coalesces (acts and coalesces), and the enemy character 554 (acts and coalesces). UF
The effect of shooting down O) with a bullet is executed. As a notice of change in hold, the mode (color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the hold display 533d-533g in the second hold display unit 530b may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

Every time a new special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the hold display 533 imitating a bullet in the second hold display unit 530b is erased, and the tank character 563 and the enemy character 554 (U) are deleted.
You can perform the effect as if it were used for bombarding FO). The erased hold display 533 becomes the changing hold display 533b of the holding digestion area 540, but the changing hold display 533b (▽
) Is a mode different from the hold display 533 that imitates a bullet.

In addition, (d 1) to (ne 1) are from (d) to (ne) except for the aspect of the hold display 533 g.
Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted. In the movie (d1), the enemy character 5
The effect may be such that 54 (UFO) is shot down and falls.

In addition, after (Ta 1), since the opening of the latter half of the Fuden is completed and the state is left-handed, FIG. 54
As in A, the remaining hold digestion mode as the production mode is the mode before the end of the opening of the normal power supply from (Su 1) to (So 1) and the mode from (Ta 1) to (Na 1) (or (Nu 1)). It is divided into modes after the end of the opening of the public power. Therefore, the background images (shown by hatching) from (Su 1) to (So 1) and (Ta 1)
The background images (shown by shading) and the like of (na 1) (or (nu 1)) are different, and the production modes are different. In addition, the enemy character 554 in the mode before the end of the opening of the normal power and the mode after the end of the opening of the general power.
The production may have a commonality, such as making the (UFO) the same.

As shown in FIG. 69E-F above, the effect mode in the predetermined state in which the normal electric power is converted to the open state after the end of the time saving state is different from the effect mode other than the predetermined state. The production mode other than the predetermined state is the production mode from (Ta 1) to (Na 1) (or (Nu 1)) during the digestion of the remaining hold when the normal power is closed, and the production mode during the time saving state ( These are the production modes from c) to (sa), the production mode in the big hit state, and the production mode in the normal game state (normal mode) in which there is no battle production. In particular, even in the same right-handed state, by making the effect different from that in the time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize a predetermined state in which the normal electric power is opened after the time-saving state ends. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, when the low probability of the normal figure is made larger than 0% (for example, about several%), the normal power is converted to the open state by hitting the normal game during the normal game state (normal mode). However, in this case as well, it may be included in the predetermined state in which the normal power is converted into the open state.

As described above, another example of the effect on the display device 41 after the big hit of the symbol B has been described with reference to FIGS. 69E-F. However, in the production after the big hit of the symbol CF, the timing of the end of the time saving state is before (Sa), so the mode of the hold display is changed from before (Sa) to the residual hold digestion mode. The mode of the character, the mode of the character, the screen background, and other effects are changed. If there is a sense of incongruity when changing the mode of the hold display or the mode of the character before (sa), only the screen background may be switched to the one in the remaining hold digestion mode.

In addition, after the big hit of symbol A, the effect of accumulating the special figure 2 hold from (d) to (f) is executed until the end of the second half opening of the normal train (the end of the normal train operation), and from (ki) to (so 1). ) May be omitted, and the effects after (Ta 1) may be executed after the second half opening is completed. Further, after the big hit of the symbol G, for example, the productions (d) to (sa) may be repeated until the end of the time saving state.

[Modified example of the first embodiment]
A modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 77. In this transformation,
In the symbols BF, the number of time reductions is constant at 4 times, but the support state, which is the state related to the mode of normal power support, differs depending on the symbol, and as a result, the specified remaining hold number (specified remaining hold number) also It changes according to the design.

[Number of time reductions corresponding to the symbol related to the modified example and the specified number of remaining reservations]
FIG. 70 is a table showing the support state, the number of time reductions, the specified number of remaining holdings, and the like corresponding to the symbol, which is a hit type of the special figure variation display game, with respect to the modified example. The symbols A and G are the same as those in FIG. 55 except that they are in the support state A, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In symbol BF, which is a type of jackpot in the special figure 2 variable display game that started during the normal high probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is constant at 4 times, but the jackpot in symbol BF is constant. The subsequent support states are the support states AE, respectively, and change according to the symbol.

Further, in the symbols BD, the specified remaining number of reservations is 4, 6, and 8 depending on the support state, respectively, but in the symbols E and F, the support state D and the support state E are random. Is. Therefore,
The total number of special figure 2 holds that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends is 8, 10 and 12 for symbols BD, and is random for symbols E and F.

In the symbols BD, the continuation rates are 65.6% and 73., respectively, for the 1/8 small hit probability.
It was 7% and 79.9%, and the confirmation mode transition rates were 24.3%, 32.3%, and 38., respectively.
It will be 5%. In symbol E and symbol F, the continuation rate and the confirmation mode transition rate are random. The continuation rate is the total of the special figure 2 hold that is consumed after the big hit state ends (that is, the special figure 2 after the big hit state ends).
Depending on the number of times the variable display game is executed), the continuation rate increases as the total increases in the symbols BD. Further, as the specified remaining number of holdings increases in the symbols BD, the confirmation mode transition rate increases.

In this way, the operation mode (support state, support mode) of the hobby after the end of the jackpot state differs depending on the type (symbol B-F) of the jackpot (special result), so that the type of jackpot (symbol B-F) is different. Depending on F), the continuation rate and the confirmation mode transition rate are different, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Characteristics of the normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric operation related to the modified example]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal map variation display game and the normal electric operation with respect to the modified example. The probability of hitting a normal map, the maximum number of counts of a normal train, and the stop time of a normal map are the same as in FIG.

There is one type or multiple (4 in this case) of the hit symbols (hit stop symbol, normal symbol per symbol) in the normal symbol variation display game, and there are multiple hit symbols in the jackpot symbol E and symbol F, but other jackpot symbols. Then there is one type.

The starting memory number (the number of holdings of the normal figure) of the normal figure fluctuation display game is 1, and the game ball can enter the normal figure start gate 34 even during the hit state (during the normal electric operation) and the fluctuation of the normal figure fluctuation display game. When it passes, only 1 memory of the start of the normal map variation display game is stored. Therefore, in this modification, the process of step A7706 of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 34) is not executed, and the number of reserved figures is set even when the game is changing or the game is hit. Can be updated by +1.

The fluctuation time of the normal map, which is the fluctuation time of the game, is set according to the support state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is a fixed 48 msec. As described above, the total of the normal map fluctuation time and the normal map stop time is preferably smaller than 600 msec.

[Public opening pattern related to the modified example]
72 and 73 show an opening pattern (general electric opening pattern) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (general electric power) of this modified example. The normal power opening pattern shows the operation mode of the normal power by one hit of the normal power. The normal electric opening pattern selected after the end of the jackpot state differs depending on the jackpot symbols AG (that is, the type of jackpot). The numbers enclosed in the square frame are the values of the control pointers (FIG. 41, etc.) per normal drawing.

After the end of the jackpot state in the symbols A, B, and G, the state related to the mode of the normal electric support becomes the support state A (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal power opening pattern in the support state A,
In the operation of the normal power by hitting the normal power once, the normal power is released twice with an interval in between. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 100 msec, and the normal power opening time of both the first half open and the second half open is 1300 msec.

Assuming that the rate of fire of the game balls is 100 per minute, 600 msec for Fuden
Since a game ball can be won for each game, it is assumed that four game balls will be won in the normal power in one normal power operation in the support state A. As a matter of course, if the game balls do not win well in Fuden, the actual number of winnings will be less than the expected number (4 in this case). The total opening time of 2600 msec for the first half open and the second half open is slightly larger than the product of the winning interval of 600 msec and the expected number (4 in this case), so that there is a margin.

After the end of the jackpot state in symbol C, the state related to the mode of the normal electric support becomes the support state B (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal power release pattern of the support state B, the normal power is opened twice with an interval in the normal power operation by one normal power operation. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 30,000 msec, and the normal power opening time of both the first half open and the second half open is 1950 msec.

Assuming that the rate of fire of the game balls is 100 per minute, 600 msec for Fuden
Since a game ball can be won for each game, it is assumed that six game balls will be won in the normal power in one normal power operation in the support state B. The total opening time of 3900 msec for the first half open and the second half open is slightly larger than the product of the winning interval of 600 msec and the expected number (6 in this case), so that there is a margin.

After the end of the jackpot state in symbol D, the state related to the mode of the normal electric support becomes the support state C (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal power release pattern of the support state C, the normal power is opened twice with an interval in the normal power operation by one normal power operation. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 30,000 msec, and the normal power opening time of both the first half open and the second half open is 2600 msec.

Assuming that the rate of fire of the game balls is 100 per minute, 600 msec for Fuden
Since a game ball can be won for each game, it is assumed that eight game balls will be won in the normal power in one normal power operation in the support state C. The total opening time of 5200 msec for the first half open and the second half open is slightly larger than the product of the winning interval of 600 msec and the expected number (8 in this case), so that there is a margin.

As described above, the period of the open state and the period of the closed state (interval) of the normal electric power during the specific gaming state after the end of the jackpot state or after the specific gaming state is set according to the symbol which is the type of the jackpot (special result). Can be changed. Therefore, even if the number of time reductions is the same four times, the specified number of remaining holdings and the actual number of remaining holdings can be changed according to the big hit symbol, and the variation of the game is increased and the interest of the game is improved.

After the end of the jackpot state in the symbols E and F, the states related to the mode of the normal electric support become the support states D and E (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 73 (A), in the support states D and E, there are four hit symbols of the normal figure variation display game, symbols 1 to 4 per normal figure, and each time a normal figure is hit, the hit symbols are sorted by random numbers ( Selected by lottery). The states in which symbols 1 to 4 per normal figure are selected in the support states D and E are the support states D1, E1, the support states D2, E2, and the support states D3, respectively.
It may be called E3, support state D4, E4.

In the normal electric operation by one normal figure hit, the symbols 1 to 4 per normal figure (support state D1-D4,
In E1-E4), the normal power is opened 1 to 4 times with an interval in between, respectively. Regardless of the number of times of opening according to the symbols 1 to 4 (support state D1-D4, E1-E4) per normal figure, one normal power interval time (wait time) is 100 msec, and one normal power opening time. Is 1500 msec.

Further, both the support state D1 and the support state E1, both the support state D2 and the support state E2, both the support state D3 and the support state E3, and both the support state D4 and the support state E4 have the same normal power opening pattern. is there.

Assuming that the rate of fire of the game balls is 100 per minute, 600 msec for Fuden
A game ball can be won for each. Therefore, based on the total opening time, the number of game balls that win a prize in one normal electric operation is 2 in the support states D1 and E1, and 5 in the support states D2 and E2.
It is assumed that there are 7 in the support states D3 and E3 and 10 in the support states D4 and E4. As a matter of course, if the game ball does not win well in Fuden, the actual number of winnings will be less than the expected number.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (B) and 73 (C), the support state D and the support state E differ only in the distribution rate (selection rate) of the symbols 1 to 4 per normal symbol in the distribution (lottery) by the random number of the winning symbol. In the support state D corresponding to the symbol E, the distribution rates (selection rates) of the symbols 1 to 4 per normal symbol are 40%, 30%, 20%, and 10%, respectively. In the support state E corresponding to the symbol F, the distribution rates (selection rates) of the symbols 1 to 4 per normal symbol are 10%, 20%, 30%, and 40%, respectively. Therefore, in the normal power operation by one normal power operation, the average value of the number of times the normal power is released is larger in the support state E (average value = 3 times) than in the support state D (average value = 2 times). ..

In this way, when the jackpot (special result) is of a predetermined type (designs E, F), the operation mode of the normal electric power after the end of the jackpot state is changed to a plurality of operation modes (support state D1) each time the jackpot is hit. -D4, E
It is decided by sorting (lottery) from 1-E4). Therefore, if the jackpot is of a predetermined type (designs E, F), there is no specified remaining hold number, and the player cannot predict how many remaining hold numbers will actually be, and the remaining hold number will be changed. Since the game can be played with a sense of expectation, the interest of the game is improved.

[Timing chart related to the modified example]
74-76 show the game state, the normal figure probability (normal figure hit probability), the normal figure state, the normal electric state, the special figure 2 hold number, and the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure variation display game) after the big hit of this modified example. It is a timing chart which shows (figure variation) and the like. The time elapses toward the right side of the timing chart. FIG. 74 shows the case where the support state A occurs after the big hit with the symbol B, FIG. 75 shows the case where the support state C occurs after the big hit with the symbol D, and FIG. 76 shows the case where the support state C occurs after the big hit with the symbol E (or symbol F). An example shows a case where the support state D (or the support state E) is established.

Further, FIGS. 74-76 show the passage of the game ball through the normal figure start gate 34 (normal figure gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the winning of the game ball into the normal variable winning device 37 (Public train) (starting). Mouth 2
(Detection of switch 37a) is also indicated by a pulse.

74-76 is the same as in FIGS. 57-59 until the first normal electric operation and the accompanying first special figure 2 variable display game are started.

In FIG. 74, after the big hit with the symbol B, the normal power operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in the support state A is executed three times, and the normal power is released a total of six times. As described above, the game control device 100 sets the variable time (execution time) and the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game into the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game) from the end of the jackpot state. ) To control. Then, in the support state A, it is controlled so that the fourth special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the number of time reductions is executed in accordance with the third normal electric operation (normal figure hit state). It should be noted that the stop after the end of the normal figure hit state corresponds to the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal figure ending time.

The number of special figures 2 on hold increases while the normal train is open (open state), and when the public train is closed (closed state), special figure 2 is held.
It tends to decrease due to pending digestion.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation display game is changed from the 1st to the 3rd special figure 2 so that 4 special figure 2 holds can be accumulated during the time saving state and the 3rd normal electric operation. It is set longer than the fluctuation time of the display game and longer than one normal power opening time (first half opening or second half opening time).

In FIG. 74, the fourth special figure 2 variable display game is started in accordance with the end of the second half opening in the second normal electric operation, but after the end of the latter half opening and the third normal electric operation is started. If it is before, the fourth special figure 2 variable display game may be ended at any time. In addition, the 4th special figure 2 variable display game is stopped at the end of the first half opening in the 3rd normal electric operation, but if it is after the end of the first half opening and before the start of the second half opening, it is the 4th time. Special Figure 2 The variable display game may be terminated at any time.

Then, after the end of the third normal electric operation started by hitting the normal figure in the time saving state, the fifth special figure 2 variable display game is controlled to be started. The fluctuation time of the 5th to 8th special figure 2 variation display games executed by the remaining hold after the end of the time reduction state may be equal to or less than the fluctuation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games in the time reduction state. As a result, the remaining hold can be quickly consumed. On the contrary, the fluctuation time of the 5th to 8th special figure 2 fluctuation display games is made longer than the fluctuation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 fluctuation display games in the time saving state, and the corresponding effect is slowly performed. You can also do it. Further, in the symbol B, the specified remaining number of holdings is four that occurred during the time saving state.

In FIG. 75, after the big hit with the symbol D, the normal power operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in the support state C is executed twice, and the normal power is released a total of four times. In support state C, 1
Four special figure 2 variable display games corresponding to the number of time reductions according to the second half opening of the second normal power operation (first second half opening) and the first half opening of the second normal power operation (second first half opening) Is controlled to be executed.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the 4th special figure 2 variation display game is the 1st to 3rd special figures so that 4 special figure 2 holds can be accumulated during the time saving state and the first half of the second normal electric operation is open. 2 Fluctuation display It is set longer than the fluctuation time of the game and longer than the one-time normal power opening time (in FIG. 75, it is set to about twice the normal power opening time). In FIG. 75, the fourth special figure 2 variation display game is stopped in accordance with the end of the first half opening in the second normal electric operation, but the fifth special figure 2 variation after the second first half opening. If you are running a display game, it may be slightly off.

The number of special figures 2 on hold increases while the normal train is open (open state), and when the public train is closed (closed state), special figure 2 is held.
It tends to decrease due to pending digestion.

Then, during the interval after the end of the second first half opening, the fifth to seventh special figure 2 variable display games are controlled to be started. After that, the second half opening in the second normal electric operation started by hitting the normal figure in the time saving state is performed after the end of the time saving state, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed while increasing the special figure 2 hold as the remaining hold. .. If the fluctuation time of the 5th and subsequent special figure 2 fluctuation display games executed by the remaining hold after the end of the time saving state is adjusted appropriately, 5 to 12 will be digested by 8 special figure 2 holdings (remaining hold) after the end of the time saving state. The second special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. In this way, in the symbol D, the specified remaining number of holdings is eight.

Since the remaining hold can be quickly exhausted, the fluctuation time of the 5th to 12th special figure 2 variation display games may be less than or equal to the fluctuation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 fluctuation display games in the time saving state. On the contrary, 5 to
The variation time of the twelfth special figure 2 variation display game may be longer than the variation time of the first to third special figure 2 variation display games in the time saving state, and the production may be performed slowly.

As in the case of symbol D, for symbol C as well, the variation time (execution time) and stop time of the special figure 2 variation display game are set as the number of executions according to the operation mode (support state B) of the normal electric power. It can be changed accordingly so that the number of remaining reservations is six. For example, for symbol C, by reducing the number of special figure 2 variable display games started during the interval of the normal train after the end of the time reduction as compared with the case of symbol D, the number of remaining reservations becomes six.

As described above, the pattern of the fluctuation time (execution time) and the stop time according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game is set according to the operation mode (support state AC) of the normal electric power. Therefore, the number of remaining hold can be changed according to the operation mode (support state A-C) of the normal electric power.

In FIG. 76, the symbol E or the symbol F is in the support state D or the support state E after the big hit in.
The normal power operation (first half open + interval + second half open + ...) is randomly repeated according to the design per normal figure, and the normal power is released several times in total. In the support state D or the support state E, it is difficult to control so that the four special figure 2 variable display games corresponding to the number of time reductions are executed in accordance with the random opening of the normal electric power.

However, the number of special figures 2 held increases during the opening (open state) of the Fuden, and during the interval of the Fuden (open state).
In the closed state), it tends to decrease due to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold.

The fluctuation time of the 4th special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the fluctuation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variation display games so that 4 special figure 2 hold can be accumulated during the time saving state. It is set longer than the opening time of one public train. The number of remaining holdings is the number of symbols 1 to 4 per normal figure when the final hit during the fluctuation of the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation display game (support state D1-D4, E1-E4).
) Corresponds to the normal operation mode. As shown in Fig. 76, when the 4th special figure 2 variation display game is changed and the pattern 4 hits the normal figure at the end, the total opening time of the normal electric power is large, so the number of remaining reservations is also large. However, when the number of symbols per game is 1 and the game is hit by a game, the total open time of the game is small, so the number of remaining holdings is also small.

In addition, since the remaining hold can be exhausted quickly, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game after the fifth time after the end of the time saving state is equal to or less than the fluctuation time of the first to third special figure 2 variable display games in the time saving state. Good. On the contrary, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game after the 5th time may be longer than the fluctuation time of the 1st to 3rd special figure 2 variable display games in the time saving state, and the production may be performed slowly. ..

As a countermeasure against the above-mentioned deviation to the previous deviation in this modification, in order to match the specified remaining reservation number with the actual remaining reservation number, after the big hit of the symbols BD, during the fourth special figure 2 variable display game. It can be mentioned that the fifth special figure 2 variable display game is not executed until the opening of the public electric power (opening in the first half) that started in 1 is completed. As a measure against the deviation after the above-mentioned deviation, in order to match the specified number of remaining holdings with the actual number of remaining holdings, after the big hit of the symbols BD, the regular figure hit in the 4th special figure 2 variable display game. It is possible to execute the latter half opening of the Fuden by after the start of the special figure 2 variable display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 0 times for symbol B and 2 times for symbol D). After the big hits of symbols E and F, the number of remaining holdings cannot be specified and is random, so it is not necessary to take measures against deviation. On the contrary, since it is not necessary to take measures against deviation, the symbols E and F are also related to the symbols BD.
Similar to the above, it is also possible to provide four symbols per ordinary figure.

The above is the explanation after the end of the big hit state in each symbol, but other than the 4th special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state (1st to 3rd and 5th and subsequent special figure 2 variable display games). The fluctuation time may be the same regardless of the symbols BF to simplify the control and reduce the storage capacity used in the ROM 111b, the RAM 111c, or the like.

[Example of screen transition related to modified example]
77A and 77B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the modified example of the first embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 corresponds to FIG. 75 (after the big hit of symbol D).

After the same production as in (a) to (e) of FIG. 69 is performed, the open state and the closed state of the normal electric power are repeated during the time saving state, but as shown in (e 1), the general electric power is closed. In the state (when the public train is closed), the number of special figure 2 holds decreases and the number of special figure 2 holds does not reach four.

After that, at the end of the time saving state in (f), the number of special figures 2 held reaches four, and after that, the same effect as in (ki) and (ku) in FIG. 69 is performed.

Next, in (K1) to (K4), unlike (K) to (Sa) in FIG. 69, characters such as the hold display 533e-533i of the second hold display unit 530b (standby area) are allies. It is not a sub-character that supports the character 557, but a one-on-one battle with the enemy character 554 as the main character. After (c4), the same effect as after (tsu) in FIG. 69 is performed, and here, the hold display 533e- of the second hold display unit 530b (standby area) is performed.
A character such as 533i is used as a sub-character 558 that supports a friendly character 557.

In addition, after the end of the time saving state, the special figure 2 hold decreases from (ku) to (ku 2) when the normal train is closed (when the normal train is closed), and the special figure 2 hold is reduced, and the normal train from (ku 3) to (ku 4) is opened. In the state (while the public train is open), the special figure 2 hold increases. Then, in the closed state of the Fuden, there is not much profit to hit right even in the right-handed state, and the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in an inconspicuous small mode, and in the open state of the Fuden, the profit to hit right is not so much. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 551 is displayed in a conspicuous large mode.

Although the first embodiment and its modification have been described above, the specific gaming state may be a probabilistic state (excluding the latent probabilistic state) as well as a time saving state. In addition, 1 type 2 type mixer (1 type 2 type machine)
Not only that, the first embodiment and a modified example thereof may be simply applied to one type of gaming machine (so-called digi-pachi) having a specific gaming state (time saving state or probabilistic changing state). In one type of gaming machine that has a probabilistic state, a big hit can be expected for the remaining number of pachinko machines, especially for models with a high probability of big hit even with a low probability of special figures after the end of the probabilistic state (so-called Amadeji, a little crack). The effect is great when the embodiment and its modified example are applied.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming control means (for example, a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, Fuden) that can be converted into an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state or a probabilistic changing state). The game control means (for example, the game control device 100) can execute a game (for example, a special figure 2 variable display game) based on a start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) generated by winning a prize in the variable winning device. The game value (for example, the number of time reductions or the number of probable changes) given to the player when the game has a special result (for example, a small hit or a big hit, and a big hit by a V prize after the small hit) in a specific game state is a specific game. It is different from the game value given to the player when the game has a special result after the end of the state.

In such a game machine 10, since there is a difference in the game value given by the special result of the game during the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state, it occurs during the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state. The player will be overwhelmed by the number of start-up memories in which the game is executed, and the interest of the game will be improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming control means (for example, a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a game (a game of changing a normal map). The gaming machine 10 is a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric machine) that can be converted into an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (normal figure variable display game) becomes a specific result (per normal figure). To be equipped. The game control means can convert the variable winning device to the open state multiple times by deriving one specific result (per normal figure), and the probability that the game will be a specific result (per normal figure) is high. The variable winning device can be converted into an open state in both the high-probability state, which is a probability, and the low-probability state, which is a low probability.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability that the game will have a specific result (per normal figure) is low, the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal electric) can be converted into an open state, and the variable winning device can be obtained. Since the starting memory (for example, holding the special figure 2) generated by winning a prize in the device can be stored, the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game. Be prepared. The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, Fuden) that can be converted into an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state or a probabilistic changing state). The game control means can generate a predetermined state (for example, a right-handed state with a low probability of a normal figure) in which the variable winning device is converted into an open state even after the end of the specific game state.
The effect mode in the predetermined state is different from the effect mode other than the predetermined state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the end of the specific gaming state, a predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted to the open state as in the specific gaming state can be distinguished from the specific gaming state in terms of appearance. In addition, the interest of the game can be improved by setting the production mode peculiar to the predetermined state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special figure variation display game) corresponding to the open state of the variation winning device. Therefore, with the variable winning device open, the start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold), which is the execution right of the game (special figure variable display game), is not exhausted.
The starting memory can be stored by winning a prize in the variable winning device.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variation display game) for a long time corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device, and short-time the game corresponding to the closed state of the variable winning device. It can be executed with. Therefore, the variable winning device is open during the specific game state (for example, the first half is open).
The start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is accumulated a lot, and the start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is digested a lot in the closed state (for example, interval) after that, and the open state (for example, the latter half open) is reopened after the end of the specific game state. ), You can save a lot of start-up memory (for example, special figure 2 hold). Therefore, the number of start memories (remaining hold numbers) that are digested after the end of the specific game state is set to the upper limit of the number of start memories (for example, 4).
Can be more than. Furthermore, the number of remaining holds can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes a game (special figure variation display game) in response to the open state of the variable winning device for a time longer than the open state of the variable winning device. Therefore,
Even if the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game) deviate, the discrepancy can be absorbed, and the actual remaining hold number is just the specified remaining hold number. Match.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special figure variation display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more in the closed state of the variation winning device. Therefore, even if the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game) deviate, the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining hold number exceeds the specified remaining hold number. Match without any shortage.

In the first embodiment, as the game control means, the game (special figure variation display game) is played a predetermined number of times (
For example, the number of time reductions or the number of probable changes) is controlled so that the specific game state ends when it is executed. Then, after the end of the specific game state, the number of times the game is executed based on the start memory generated by winning the variable winning device (the specified number of remaining holdings 5 to 9) is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions or the number of probable changes). ). Therefore, if a predetermined number of times is selected by lottery, the number of remaining holdings will be randomly and variable, which is set by lottery, and the remaining number of holdings will make the player happy and unhappy, and the interest of the game will be improved.

In the first embodiment, as the game control means, the game (special figure variation display game) has a special result (
A predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions or the number of probable changes) can be set as the game value to be given to the player in the case of a small hit or a big hit), and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type (design) of the special result. Therefore, the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game state based on the special result is set by lottery (distribution), becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5), and changes randomly, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the first embodiment, the game control means includes the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed after the end of the specific game state (the specified number of remaining holdings) and the predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions or the number of probable changes). Is constant (for example, 10). Therefore, the number of remaining holdings can be changed while keeping the continuation rate of the specific gaming state the same. If the same effect mode is executed while this fixed number of special figure 2 variable display games are executed during the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state, the player is in the specific game state or after the end of the specific game state. It becomes difficult to distinguish between them, and it becomes surprising that a large game value can be obtained by the jackpot of the remaining hold after the end of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special figure 1 variable display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variable display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the start memory generated by winning the game ball in the predetermined winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36), and by winning the game ball in the variable winning device. The second game can be executed based on the starting memory that occurs. The second game (Special Figure 2 variable display game) is replaced by the first game (Special Figure 1)
It can be executed with priority over the variable display game), and when the first game is executed in the specific gaming state, it is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state is reduced, and the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state.
Is executed, the start of the second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is not significantly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the games are the first game (normal map variation display game) and the second game (
Special figure fluctuation display game) is included. The game control means can execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (normal drawing start gate 34), and by winning a prize in the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, Fuden). The second game (special figure variation display game) can be executed based on the generated start memory. In the specific game state, even if the game ball passes in a predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34) during the execution of the first game and the hit state generated by the specific result of the first game, the first game Does not generate start-up memory (normal figure memory), which is the right to execute the game.

Therefore, the first game (normal map variation display game) can be started only during the stop display, and the normal map variation display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (general map start gate 34) during the stop display. To do. In this way, the start memory (normal map memory) of the first game (normal map variable display game)
Is practically not accumulated, so the first game (normal map variation display game) is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the operation of the variable winning device due to the hit of the first game (normal figure variation display game) and the second game (special figure variation display game) can be easily linked without any deviation.

In the first embodiment, the game control means ends the specific game state when the open state of the variable prize device (normal variable prize device 37, Fuden) ends a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the specific game state. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific gaming state is extended by setting the number of winnings to the variable winning device to less than a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions or the number of probable changes) by stopping. Further, it is possible to prevent the open state of the variable winning device from being excessively increased due to the hit of the first game (normal figure variation display game) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the game execution time (variation time) based on the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed from the end of the special game state. Therefore,
The game (special figure variable display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable winning device, and the start memory (for example, special figure) that is the right to execute the game (special figure variable display game) when the variable winning device is open. 2 Hold) can be saved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result (for example, a small hit or a big hit, including a big hit by V winning after the small hit). , A special gaming state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 can be converted into an open state and a closed state, and is easier to convert into an open state than in a special gaming state in a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state or a probabilistic changing state) after the special gaming state (a variable winning device ( It is equipped with a normal variable winning device 37, a pachinko machine). The variable winning device has different operation modes (support state, support mode) after the end of the special game state depending on the type (symbol) of the special result.

Therefore, depending on the type of special result (symbol), the number of remaining holds, which is the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed after the specific game state, the continuation rate of the specific game state, etc. are also the types of special result (symbol).
It changes according to. For this reason, players have come to pay attention to the type of special result (design).
The fun of the game will also improve.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control means capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game). The game control means sets the game execution time and the game stop time according to the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state. The pattern of the execution time and the stop time according to the number of times the game is executed is set according to the operation mode (support state AC) of the variable winning device. Therefore, depending on the type of special result (design) and the operation mode of the variable winning device (support state AC), the game after the end of the specific game state (special figure variable display game).
The number of remaining holds, which is the number of executions of, can be changed.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, when the special result is a predetermined type (symbol E or symbol F), the game control means performs a plurality of operations of the variable winning device after the end of the special game state. It is decided by lottery (lottery of symbols per ordinary figure) from the aspect. Therefore, if the special result is a predetermined type (symbol E or symbol F), there is no specified remaining hold number, and the player cannot predict how many remaining hold numbers will actually be, and the remaining hold number cannot be predicted. Since the game can be played with a sense of expectation in the number, the interest of the game is improved.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, the game control means sets the period of the open state and the period of the closed state of the variable winning device during the specific game state or after the specific game state as the type of special result (symbol BD).
It can be changed according to. Therefore, the number of remaining reservations can be changed according to the type of special result (designs BD) and the operation mode of the normal electric power (support state AC).

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. Second
The embodiment relates to a display mode of a hold display (starting memory display) corresponding to a second start memory during or after a time saving state (normal power support state, electric support) as a specific gaming state.

[Example of screen transition from the time saving state to after the time saving state]
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, a display mode of the hold display corresponding to the second start memory from the time saving state to the time saving state will be described.

FIG. 78 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition from the time saving state to the time saving state. Further, FIG. 79 is an example (middle stage) of the screen transition from the time saving state to the time saving state, and FIG. 80 is an example (second half) of the screen transition from the time saving state to the time saving state.

(A) of FIG. 78 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first start memory generated before the big hit after the time is shortened after the big hit ends. is there.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. In the variable display area 610, the left area 6
The first decorative symbol A (identification information, symbol, special decorative symbol) is enlarged in 10A, the first decorative symbol B is displayed in the right area 610B, and the first decorative symbol C is enlarged in the middle area 610C. It is displayed in a variable manner ("↓↓↓").

In the upper right corner of the display screen, a variable display area 615 is provided in which the variable display game is executed by a decorative special symbol (small symbol). The small symbols in the variable display area 615 are displayed in a variable manner (“↓↓↓”) in a normal variable mode. The results of the variable display of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are in agreement with each other. Further, when the variable display game is being executed, at least one of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the time saving state, the variable display area 6
10 decorations Only small symbols may be variablely displayed in the variable display area 615 in the upper right corner without displaying the first symbols A to C. In this way, the variable display area 610 is in a specific gaming state such as a time saving state.
By not displaying the variable display related to the special figure 1 variable display game in the first symbols A to C, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main game in the normal game state, and the main game in the specific game state. It becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a game, and the game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the time saving state, the immediately preceding stop symbol, that is, the jackpot symbol may be left displayed in the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610. Default (initial state) symbol (for example, "123"
") Etc. may be displayed while waiting.

Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are provided. Special figure 1 Hold number display unit 650 and Special figure 2 Hold number display unit 660
Is displayed with a number "1" indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 and a number "0" indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 respectively.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, a start storage display area (specific display unit, specific display area)
As a result, the holding digestion area 640 (changing hold display area) and the second hold display unit 630b of the square frame
And are provided.

In the hold digestion area 640, there is a hold display (start memory display, special figure 1) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) related to the variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) being executed (during digestion). The changing hold display 633w is displayed as a hold display, a special figure changing hold display, and a special figure digesting hold display). That is, there are two first start memories that occurred before the big hit, and the hold display corresponding to the start memory (old start memory) that occurred earlier of the two first start memories is the changing hold display 6.
It corresponds to 33w.

Further, the start memory (new start memory) generated later of the two first start memories is waiting without being digested, and the number indicating the special figure 1 hold number of the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is described above. It becomes "1". The variable hold display 633w corresponding to the first start memory and the hold digestion area 640, which is an area in which the variable hold display 633w is displayed, may be hidden in the time saving state.

The second hold display unit 630b displays a hold display (start memory display, special figure 2 hold display, waiting hold display) corresponding to the generated second start memory (special figure 2 hold). For example, in (A) of FIG. 78, which has just entered the time saving state immediately after the end of the big hit, the second start memory has not yet occurred, and the hold display corresponding to the second start memory is not displayed (0 pieces). Further, the start memory of the main variable display game in the specific game state such as the time saving state is the second start memory. In addition, it should be noted.
Similar to the first embodiment, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is defined as the main variable display game according to the game state and the like.

In the start memory display area at the bottom of the display screen, the first hold display unit 630a on which the hold display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed is hidden, and corresponds to the waiting first start memory. The hold display is not displayed during the time saving state. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the effect control device 300 replaces the second holding display unit 630b with the first holding display unit 63.
0a can be displayed at the bottom of the display screen (specific display unit). That is, the start memory of the main variable display game in the normal game state is the first start memory.

Further, the effect control device 300 may display the right-handed display (right-handed instruction image) from the time saving state to the occurrence of the second start memory. Further, even after the second start memory is generated, the right-handed display may be continuously displayed in the right-handed state. Since the player is performing a right-handed game during the big hit game (special game), the effect control device 300 may not display the right-handed display unless the player makes a left-handed game.

FIG. 78 (i) is a display device 41 when a plurality of second start memories are generated after the special figure 1 variable display game is executed as shown in FIG. 78 (a) based on the first start memory. It is a display screen of.

The second start memory is generated when the game ball wins a prize in the second start winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, Fuden). At that time, for example, when three second start memories are generated as shown in (i) of FIG. 78, the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 becomes "3". At the same time, the hold display 633x, 633y, 633z is displayed on the second hold display unit 630b.

The hold display 633x, 633y, 633z displayed on the second hold display unit 630b is the first.
It is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, "▽") different from the display mode (for example, "○") of the hold display 633w corresponding to the start memory. The hold display and shape of the first start memory ("○" and ""
▽ ”etc.) In addition to different colors, patterns (patterns), sizes, etc., may be different as predetermined display modes. Therefore, since the hold display corresponding to the first start memory and the hold display corresponding to the second start memory are displayed in different display modes, the player can determine which start memory is the hold display. It becomes easier to do.

Further, at the lower part of the hold display 633x, 633y, 633z, a rectangular square frame (for example, "□") serving as a pedestal as a predetermined display mode indicating that these hold displays are special hold displays.
") Is displayed. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the pedestal of the square frame, the hold display 6
It is possible to recognize that 33x, 633y, and 633z are special hold displays, and it is possible to raise expectations. The special hold display becomes a hold display corresponding to the first remaining hold, which will be described later, and the effect is switched to a predetermined effect mode when the variable display game is executed based on the special hold display. In addition, in (i) of FIG. 78 and the figure described later, the explanatory note "new" is shown at the upper part of the hold display so that it can be seen that the hold display is newly generated, but the display device 41 The character "new" may be actually displayed on the display screen of the player to notify the player that a new hold display has occurred.

FIG. 78 (c) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game executed in FIGS. 78 (a) and (i) stops fluctuating.

For example, as shown in (c) of FIG. 78, the variable display game is out of alignment (for example, "358".
When the fluctuation is stopped at "), the next fluctuation display game is executed according to the waiting hold (starting memory). Further, in FIG. 78 (c), a second start memory is newly generated, and the hold display 633 is displayed on the second hold display unit 630b. The number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is “4”. In the following description, it is assumed that all the stop results of the variable display game are out of order.

In addition, if the stop result of the variable display game is a big hit or a small hit, the effect associated with the big hit or the small hit in the middle of the following explanation (fanfare effect, effect instructing how to hit to aim for V prize, etc.) It shall be possible to transition to. In addition, the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation display game in the case of a production accompanying a big hit or a small hit is set longer than the fluctuation time value in the case of an outlier.
The effect control device 300 can execute a dedicated effect as the effect. In addition, the fluctuation time value in the case of a big hit or the like may be a fixed value (fixed fluctuation time value).

Further, since the special figure 1 variation display game is executed first by the time the second start memory is generated, it becomes easy to accumulate the second start memory during the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, when the player switches to the predetermined production mode (predetermined production stage), the player can easily visually recognize a series of productions (continuous productions) by the plurality of second start memories without interruption. It can enhance the interest. Further, the effect control device 300 executes the special figure 1 variation display game in the time saving state with the shortened variation (fixed variation time value). Therefore, since the special figure 1 variable display game can be stopped fluctuating without being delayed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be started promptly, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game stops fluctuating, if there is a waiting second start memory, the square frame of the reserved digestion area 640 changes, and it is dedicated for digesting the second start memory. Switch to a frame (eg, "convex pedestal"). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the next variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and it is possible to raise the expectation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect control device 300 is the first hold display unit 63 during the time saving state in FIG. 78 (c) or the like.
Although 0a is not displayed, the first hold display unit 630a may be displayed together with the second hold display unit 630b to display the hold display corresponding to the first start storage. Further, the display mode (frame) of the hold digestion area 640 is a display mode (square frame, for example, “□”) for the hold display of the first start memory and a display mode (dedicated frame) for the hold display of the second start memory. , For example, "convex pedestal") and display in a common display mode, for example, a display mode for holding display of the second start memory (dedicated frame, for example, "convex pedestal"). You may.

FIG. 78 (e) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the second start memory after the special figure 1 variable display game. Game control device 100
Can execute the special figure 2 variation display game by giving priority to the second start memory over the waiting (memory) first start memory (special figure 2 priority variation).

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, as shown in (e) of FIG. 78, the variable display area 6
10 decorations The first symbols A to C and the small symbols in the variable display area 615 are variablely displayed (“↓↓↓”). Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started, the hold displays 633x, 633y, 633z, and 633 displayed on the second hold display unit 630b are moved (hold shift) one by one to the left side, and the second hold display unit 630b is displayed. 2 One hold display 633x at the left end of the hold display unit 630b moves to the hold digestion area 640, and the changing hold display 633x is displayed on the convex pedestal of the hold digestion area 640.

Further, the effect control device 300 is used when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed during the time saving state.
The production can be switched to the production mode (time reduction mode, time reduction stage) corresponding to the time reduction state. When the time saving state is reached, or when the first variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed during the time saving state ((A) in FIG. 78), the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state is set. You may switch the production.

Further, in (e) of FIG. 78, a new hold display 633a is generated, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 6
The number indicating the number of special figures 2 held in 60 is "4".

In the changing hold display 633x of the hold digestion area 640, for example, a character that notifies the player of the remaining number of times of the predetermined effect mode of "remaining 4" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 78 (e), a number indicating the number of remaining times may be displayed integrally with the changing hold display 633x, and the “remaining” may be displayed above the changing hold display 633x. According to such a display mode, only the number indicating the remaining number of times can be switched according to the hold shift, so that it becomes easy to understand which number is displayed corresponding to the hold display during fluctuation, and a predetermined number is determined. It becomes easier for the player to accurately grasp the remaining number of times in the production mode.

In addition, when the hold digestion area 640 is displayed in the common display mode, when the hold display of the first start memory is displayed in the hold digestion area 640, the character notifying the remaining number of times such as "remaining 4" is not displayed. You may do it. Further, when the hold display of the first start memory is displayed in the hold digestion area 640, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the characters for notifying the remaining number of times by setting the display mode to be inconspicuous such as translucent or gray. It may be displayed as.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is set to 1, and the variable pending display 633 is displayed.
Special figure 2 corresponding to x When the variable display game stops fluctuating, the time saving state ends (time saving end), and
The game state shifts to the transition state. Then, the second start memory (holding in FIG. 2), which occurred during the time saving state (during the time saving) but was not digested during the time saving, was digested in the transition state after the time saving as the remaining hold. Will be done. In (e) of FIG. 78, the hold display corresponding to the remaining hold is the hold display 633y, 633x, 633, 633a. Therefore, in the transition state, the jackpot probability and the normal figure probability are the same as in the normal game state, while the small hit probability (for example, 1/8) is likely to be generated by the digestion of the remaining hold, which is an advantageous state. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the transition state may be stochastically included in the normal gaming state, or may be treated separately from the normal gaming state because it is an advantageous state. In addition, the player passes V during the small hit (
A big hit can be generated by passing a game ball through the V winning opening, V winning) (Type 1 2
Seed mixer).

Here, in the first embodiment, all the second start memory (holding in FIG. 2) that is digested after the end of the time saving is called the remaining hold, but in the second embodiment, for example, it occurs during the time saving and after the time saving ends. The special figure 2 hold that is digested is called the predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold, the remaining hold that occurs during the time reduction), and the special figure 2 hold that occurs after the end of the time reduction is called the overhold (second remaining hold, excessive remaining hold). You may call it.

Further, for example, in the second embodiment, the first predetermined piece of the special figure 2 hold that occurs during the time reduction and is digested after the time reduction ends is called a predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold), and after the predetermined remaining hold. The special figure 2 hold that is digested may be called an excessive hold (second remaining hold).

After the variable display game related to the predetermined remaining hold is executed, when the variable display game related to the excessive hold is started to be executed, the effect is switched from the predetermined effect mode (predetermined effect stage) to another effect mode. Therefore, in other words, the predetermined remaining hold is the remaining hold in which the variable display game is executed during the predetermined effect mode, and the excessive hold is the remaining hold in which the variable display game is executed during the other effect mode. Become.

For example, in (e) of FIG. 78, a hold display 63 that occurs during the time reduction and is digested after the time reduction ends.
3y, 633x, 633, and 633a are hold displays corresponding to the predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold, time-saving and medium-time occurrence remaining hold). In addition, in this case, the predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold, remaining holding during short working hours)
The number of is, for example, four.

FIG. 78 (O) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first first remaining hold after the end of the time reduction.

When the variable display game based on the first residual hold is started to be executed, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect from the time saving mode to, for example, the time saving medium generation remaining hold digestion mode in the transition state as a predetermined effect mode.

The time-saving medium-time generation residual hold digestion mode is a mode for digesting the first residual hold (predetermined residual hold, time-saving medium-time occurrence residual hold) that occurs during the time reduction and is digested after the end of the time reduction.

When a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the first residual hold is digested in the time-saving medium-occurrence residual hold digestion mode, the subsequent hold (excess hold, second residual hold, excessive residual hold) is digested. mode(
The production shifts to the first production).

In addition, as a mode including these time-saving and medium-occurrence residual hold digestion modes and excess hold digestion modes, there is a transitional residual hold digestion mode.

For example, the effect in the time-saving and medium-time generation residual hold digestion mode as a predetermined effect mode can be executed as a series of effects in which the effect in the time-saving mode executed immediately before and the story, the characters appearing, and the like are related. Therefore, a scenario that is developed (displayed and played) over a plurality of variable display games executed based on the special figure 2 hold that is digested during the time reduction and the 1st remaining hold that is digested after the time reduction ends. Can be visually recognized by the player as a series of productions, and more complicated productions with a deep story can be enjoyed, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, as described above, the same production mode can be used as a common production mode without separating the production modes (time saving mode, remaining holding digestion mode, remaining holding digestion mode) in the advantageous state such as the transition state and the specific game state. Good.

In addition, for example, after the end of the time reduction, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (Public) is opened by opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37, further hitting the normal fluctuation display game (when the low probability of the normal figure is greater than 0%), and the like. When 37b is opened and the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, a second remaining hold occurs, and as shown in (O) of FIG. 78, a hold display 633b corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed. (Displayed as "new"). The case where the normal variable winning device 37 is opened even after the end of the time reduction is, for example, the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is open at the end of the time reduction and the open state continues slightly even after the end of the time reduction, or the first implementation. This is the case of opening the latter half of the form. The hold display 633b corresponding to the second residual hold is the first of a predetermined number (for example, 4) in the time saving medium-time occurrence residual hold digestion mode.
Excessive hold that will be digested in the overhold digestion mode, in which the residual hold transitions after it has been digested.

Hold display corresponding to the first remaining hold While a rectangular square frame (for example, "□") serving as a pedestal is displayed at the lower part of the hold display 633z, 633, 633a, the hold display 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold 63.
At the bottom of 3b, the rectangular frame that serves as the pedestal is not displayed. Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish the hold display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining hold, so that it is easy for the player to recognize to what extent the effect is performed by the time-saving and medium-time occurrence residual hold digestion mode as the predetermined effect mode. it can. Further, the characters "Last" can be displayed on the pedestal of the hold display 633a so that the hold display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining hold can be easily identified.

Further, the character (mode remaining number of times) for notifying the player of the remaining number of times of the predetermined effect mode displayed on the holding hold display 633y during the change of the holding digestion area 640 is switched to, for example, "remaining 3". Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize how many times the effect of the time-saving and medium-time generation residual hold digestion mode is performed as the predetermined effect mode.

FIG. 78 (?) Is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second first remaining hold after the end of the time reduction.

After the hold shift, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the second first remaining hold, that is, the second start memory corresponding to the changing hold display 633z, the holding digestion area 640 is held during change. The number of remaining modes displayed on the display 633z is switched to, for example, "remaining 2". Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the second remaining hold occurs, and the hold display 633c corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new"). In the remaining hold digestion mode after the end of the time reduction (remaining hold digestion mode or excess hold digestion mode), the digestion hold (variable hold display) or the hold shift effect of the waiting hold may be omitted. ..

FIG. 79 (ki) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining hold after the end of the time reduction.

After the hold shift, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed and held based on the third first remaining hold, that is, the second start memory corresponding to the changing hold display 633, as in (or) of FIG. The number of remaining modes displayed on the variable hold display 633 of the digestion area 640 is switched to, for example, "1 remaining mode". Further, the hold display 633d corresponding to the new second remaining hold is the second hold display unit 63.
Displayed at 0b (displayed as "new").

FIG. 79 (ku) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining hold after the end of the time reduction.

After the hold shift, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed and held in the same manner as in FIG. 78 (or) based on the fourth first remaining hold, that is, the second start memory corresponding to the changing hold display 633a. The number of remaining modes displayed on the pending display 633a of the digestion area 640 is, for example, "0 remaining".
Switch to.

The second hold display unit 630b has hold displays 633b and 633 corresponding to the three second remaining holds.
c and 633d are displayed. The number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is "
3 ”.

In FIG. 79, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold.
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when the second start memory (holding of special figure 2) occurs after (ku) of FIG. 79.

When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the second remaining hold of the second start memory occurs, and the hold display 633e corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new"). Further, the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is “4”. Then, the number of 1st remaining hold on standby becomes 0, and the number of 2nd remaining hold becomes 4.

In FIG. 79 (ko), the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold.
It is a display screen of the display device 41 when transitioning to the result screen 670 after (ke) of FIG. 79.

The special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth first residual hold, that is, the last (latest) first residual hold, and in the latter half of the variation, the effect control device 300 displays the display screen of the display device 41. A result screen 670 showing the game result for a predetermined period can be displayed (result display).
.. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game based on the fourth 1st remaining hold is being executed, and the (Fig. 79)
As for the production mode in this), the residual digestion mode that occurs during the short time is continued. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of displaying the result, the time-saving and medium-time occurrence residual holding digestion mode may end and the mode may shift to the excessive holding digestion mode which is another effect mode.

In this way, the effect control device 300 displays the result during the execution of the variable display game based on the latest first residual hold when all the variable display games in the time saving mode to the time saving medium occurrence residual hold digestion mode are out of order. It can be performed.

On the result screen 670, the number of game balls acquired in the latest (latest) jackpot, the number of game balls acquired in a series of jackpots since the first hit (first normal jackpot), the number of series of jackpots, and the contents of the jackpot It is possible to display the breakdown of (normally big hit, big hit by V winning during time saving or transition state, production content when big hit occurs) and the like. The series of jackpots includes, for example, all jackpots that occur while the right-handed state continues.

Further, the effect control device 300 hides the variable display area 610, the second hold display unit 630b, and the hold digestion area 640 during the result display. Therefore, the result screen 670 can be displayed on the display screen in a large size, and the player can easily see the result screen 670.
It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

On the other hand, the variable display area 615, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660.
The display of is maintained, and the player can confirm the variable symbol, the number of special figures 1 reserved, and the number of special figures 2 reserved.

The result screen 670 may be displayed at the timing ((sa) in FIG. 79) when the variable display game based on the first (first) second remaining hold is started. Also, the second
When the remaining hold is not waiting, the result screen 670 may be hidden at the timing (immediately after (this) in FIG. 79) when the variable display game based on the last first remaining hold stops fluctuating.

FIG. 79 () is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the first second residual hold, the effect is changed from the predetermined effect mode (time saving and medium generation residual hold digestion mode) to the other effect mode, the excess hold digestion mode. Can be switched. Further, even if the effect is switched to the excessive hold digestion mode, the display device 41
The display of the result screen 670 is maintained on the display screen of. Therefore, the result screen 67
The player can secure a sufficient time for confirming the game result displayed in 0.

Further, by executing the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining hold, the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 becomes “3”.

In the excess hold digestion mode, the state in which the result screen 670 is displayed may be referred to as the result mode.

FIG. 79 () is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold is stopped.

For example, when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold stops fluctuating, the result mode ends, and as shown in () of FIG. 79, the display is switched from the result screen 670 and the variable display is displayed. The game stops fluctuating at an out-of-order symbol (for example, "267"). That is, the effect control device 300 is used until the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining hold is executed once.
The result screen 670 can be displayed. The timing of switching the display from the result screen 670 (trigger of screen transition) is the start winning opening 36 (first starting winning area, starting opening 1).
) Or the normal symbol start gate 34 (normal symbol start gate) may be the timing when the game ball wins or passes.

Further, in FIG. 79 (), the result screen 670 is hidden, and the first hold display unit 630a and the hold digestion area 640 are displayed. In this way, the result screen 670 started to be displayed during the variable display game based on the last first remaining hold is the first (first) second.
Fluctuation display based on remaining hold When the game stops fluctuating, it is hidden. The effect control device 300 displays the first hold display unit 630a to display the second remaining hold in standby, while the hold digestion area 640 is hidden together with the result screen 670 to display the second remaining hold during digestion. The hold (floating hold display) may be hidden.

FIG. 80 (S) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining hold.

The effect control device 300 switches the effect from the result mode to the special mode (dedicated mode, special stage) during the excess hold digestion mode, hides the result screen 670, and displays the variable display area 610 on the display screen. That is, the excess hold digestion mode can be divided into a result mode and a special mode.

In the special mode (dedicated mode, special stage), the special figure 2 variable display game for digesting the second remaining hold is relatively short compared to the average value of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state. It is executed with a variable time (fixed variable time value). Further, as the background or stage of the display screen in the special mode, a dedicated background or stage different from the normal game state may be used, or the same one as in the normal game state may be used.

Further, in the special mode, the second hold display unit 630b is not displayed and the first hold display unit 63 is not displayed.
0a is displayed. Then, the hold display 633f of the displayed first start memory (special figure 1 hold)
Is not digested and remains on standby in the first hold display unit 630a, and is hidden in the second start memory (
Special figure 2 hold) is preferentially digested (special figure 2 priority change). The number of special figures 2 reserved can be easily confirmed from the number "2" displayed on the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660.

Further, the hold display 633c (for example, “▽”) corresponding to the second second remaining hold is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes that the hold display 633f of the first hold display unit 630a does not shift to hold and that the hold display 633c of the second remaining hold is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 is changing in the special mode. It is possible to easily recognize that the variable display game of No. 2 is a special figure 2 variable display game. In this way, the start memory of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the special mode is the second start memory (special figure 2 hold).
become.

The second residual hold (changing hold display 633c) displayed in the hold digestion area 640 may be hidden, and as shown in FIG. 87 (7) described later, the first start memory (1st start memory (7)) It may be displayed in the same display mode (for example, "○") as in the special figure 1 hold).

FIG. 80 (se) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third second remaining hold, and FIG. 80 (so) is 4 This is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining hold.

As shown in FIG. 80, the third second remaining hold, that is, the changing hold display 633d.
The special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 80 based on the second start memory corresponding to, and the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660. Becomes "1".

Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (the), the fourth second remaining hold, that is, the changing hold display 6
The special figure 2 variable display game is similarly executed based on the second start memory corresponding to 33e, and the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 becomes “0”.

The special figure 2 variation display game based on the second remaining hold in the result mode and the special mode shown in FIGS. 79 (sa) to 80 (ta) is executed with a shortened variation (fixed variation time value). ..

That is, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining hold includes the special figure 2 variable display game ((e) in FIG. 78) during the time reduction and the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first remaining hold (FIG. 78). (O) ~
Compared with (ko) in FIG. 79, the fluctuation time is shorter and the fluctuation ends earlier (stop fluctuation).

In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining hold has a shorter fluctuation time and is earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game ((a) to (u) in FIG. 78) executed during a short time. finish.

Therefore, after a series of productions in the time saving mode and the time saving medium generation residual holding digestion mode are completed, the second residual holding is quickly digested in the excess holding digestion mode (first production), and the normal mode (second).
You can go back to the production). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the delay of the transition state, and the game can be progressed at a good tempo, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 variable display game executed during the time reduction also has a shorter fluctuation time and ends earlier than the special figure 2 variable display game during the time reduction and the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first remaining hold. .. Therefore, it is possible to quickly start the special figure 2 variable display game by accumulating the special figure 2 hold while suppressing the delay of the special figure 1 variable display game executed at the start of the time reduction. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to continuously visually recognize a series of effects accompanying the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game without interruption, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

FIG. 80 () is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining hold is stopped.

For example, as shown in () of FIG. 80, the variable display game is out of alignment (for example, "416".
When the fluctuation is stopped at "), the pending display 633e of the reserved digestion region 640 is hidden.
The number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is “0”.

When all the second remaining hold is exhausted, the special mode ends and the production switches to the normal mode.
In addition, a left-handed display 671 (left-handed instruction image) is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The left-handed display 671 is a display for instructing the player to left-handed.

The left-handed display 671 is not limited to when all the second remaining hold is exhausted, but after the time reduction ends (
It may be displayed in (O) of FIG. 78. Further, the left-handed display 671 is a diagram in which the timing of (ko) in FIG. 79 where the result screen 670 is displayed, the timing of (sa) in FIG. 79 in which the effect is switched to the excessive hold digestion mode, and the effect in which the effect is switched to the special mode. 80 (su)
It may be displayed at the timing of.

FIG. 80 (C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed based on the first start memory (special figure 1 hold).

Due to the hold shift, the changing hold display 633f corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is moved from the first hold display unit 630a to the hold digestion area 640 and displayed, and the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed based on the special figure 1 hold. Is executed.

FIG. 80 (one) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 1 variable display game stops fluctuating.

After that, for example, as shown in (1) of FIG. 80, when the variable display game stops fluctuating with an outlier symbol (for example, "521"), the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are all digested.
After that, when the first start memory or the second start memory is generated, the next variable display game is started.

In the normal mode (left-handed) in which the normal variable winning device 37 is difficult to open, it is usually difficult to generate the second start memory, and the player starts the variable display game based on the first start memory. In addition, the normal aim is to have the game ball win in the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area, starting opening 1).

Further, in the normal mode in which the first start memory is usually generated, if the second start memory is generated (when the low probability of the normal figure is larger than 0%), FIG. 79 (ko) ( ) In the result display and in the special mode of FIGS. 79 (s) to (s), the effect control device 300 is the second
The hold display unit 630b may be displayed, and the hold display corresponding to the generated second start memory may be displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the second start memory has occurred in the normal mode.

On the contrary, if the second start memory occurs in the normal mode (when the low probability of the normal figure is larger than 0%), the result is displayed in FIG. 79 (ko) (sa) or in FIGS. 79 (s) to 79 (s). As in the special mode of (the), the effect control device 300 does not display the second hold display unit 630b, and the second generated second is generated.
It is not necessary to display the hold display corresponding to the start memory. As a result, even if the second start memory is generated in the normal mode, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

[Example of screen transition from the time saving state in the time saving 100 times machine]
With reference to FIG. 81, a display mode of the hold display corresponding to the second start memory from the time reduction state in the time reduction 100 times machine will be described. In the following description, the same contents as those in FIGS. 78 to 80 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 81 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition from the time saving state in the time saving 100 times machine. In addition, the time saving 100 times machine (time saving machine) is
It is a general gaming machine capable of shifting to a time-saving state (specific gaming state), and refers to a general gaming machine capable of generating a time-saving state (general-purpose electric support state) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after a big hit.

FIG. 81 (ha) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first special figure 2 variable display game of the time reduction is executed after the game state is changed to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit.

The hold digestion area 640 is switched to a dedicated frame (for example, "convex pedestal") for digesting the second start memory, and the changing hold display 633v is held on the convex pedestal. (
It is displayed in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second start memory).

In the changing hold display 633v of the hold digestion area 640, for example, a character that notifies the player of the remaining number of times (time reduction remaining number) of the time saving mode of "remaining 99" is displayed. Note that FIG. 81
In (ha) and the figure to be described later, an explanatory note of "time reduction x th time" is shown at the upper part of the second hold display unit 630b so that the number of time reductions can be understood. Time saving x
The character "time" may be actually displayed to notify the player of the number of time reductions. By notifying the number of time reductions in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize how many times the time reduction state is the variable display game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the hold display 633u is displayed on the second hold display unit 630b in a display mode (for example, “▽”) indicating the second start memory. At the bottom of the hold display 633u, the hold display 6
A rectangular quadrangle (for example, "□") serving as a pedestal is displayed as a predetermined display mode indicating that 33u is digested in a short time. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize to which hold display the time saving state continues, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In FIG. 81 (hi), after that, the special figure 2 variable display game is repeated in the time saving state, and the time saving 9
This is a display screen of the display device 41 when the fifth special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

In the changing hold display 633w of the hold digestion area 640, for example, the time saving remaining number of "remaining 5" is displayed. Further, the hold display 633x, 633y, 633z is displayed on the second hold display unit 630b in a display mode (for example, “▽”) indicating the second start memory. At the lower part of the hold display 633x, 633y, 633z, a pedestal (for example, "□") of a predetermined display mode indicating that the product is digested in a short time is displayed in the same manner as the hold display 633u described above.

FIG. 81 (2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game executed in FIG. 81 (H) has stopped fluctuating.

For example, as shown in (2) of FIG. 81, the variable display game is out of alignment (for example, "35".
When the fluctuation is stopped at 8 ”), the next fluctuation display game is executed according to the hold (starting memory) in standby, as in (c) of FIG. 78. Also, in (U2) of FIG. 81, the second is newly added.
The start memory is generated, and the hold display 633 is displayed on the second hold display unit 630b.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game stops fluctuating, the pending digestion area 640 is in the pending display until the special figure 2 variable display game based on the next waiting second start memory is executed. Is not displayed, only a dedicated frame for digesting the second start memory (eg, "convex pedestal") is displayed. In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute the special figure 2 variable display game based on the next second start memory after performing the shift effect of the hold shift (the effect of shifting the hold), and perform the shift effect. Instead, the hold display may be instantly switched to the next position (the position after the hold shift), and then the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed. In addition, while the fluctuation is stopped, the holding display having a different color and transparency from the changing holding display during the fluctuation is displayed in the holding digestion area 640, and the next time saving remaining number (for example, "remaining 4") is displayed. May be good.

FIG. 81 (E2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game of the 96th time reduction is being executed.

In the changing hold display 633x of the hold digestion area 640, for example, the time saving remaining number of "remaining 4" is displayed. In addition, the second hold display unit 630b newly displays the hold display 633a in a display mode (for example, “▽”) indicating the second start memory.

Here, as shown in FIG. 81 (E2), the effect control device 300 has a new hold display 63.
On the pedestal (for example, "□") at the lower part of 3a, a character "Last" for notifying the end of the time saving state can be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize the timing of the end of the time reduction from the hold display without paying attention to the part displaying the remaining number of times, so that it becomes easier to grasp the flow of the game and the interest of the game can be enhanced. ..

FIG. 81 (2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the 97th time-saving special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

The second hold display unit 630b has a hold display 633 corresponding to the second start memory (special figure 2 hold).
b is newly displayed. The hold display 633b is a remaining hold that will be digested in a transition state (probabilistically a normal gaming state) that shifts after the time saving state ends (predetermined remaining hold, first remaining hold, occurrence remaining hold during time saving). Is. In this way, when the number of remaining time reductions is 3 or less, the remaining reservations to be digested after the end of the time reduction starts to accumulate in the second hold display unit 630b.

The remaining hold that is digested after the end of the time reduction is the second start memory, and the jackpot symbol random number of the second start memory has an advantage that the probability of occurrence of a probability variation state is higher than that of the jackpot symbol random number of the first start memory. It is a distribution. Therefore, during the transition state in which the remaining hold is digested (during the remaining hold digestion mode), it can be said that the game is stochastically a normal game state but an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, the effect control device 300 may also display a pedestal (for example, “□”) as a predetermined display mode at the lower part of the newly displayed hold display 633b. Even with such a display mode
The character "Last" can be visually recognized on the pedestal at the bottom of the hold display 633a, and the timing of the end of the time reduction can be recognized from the hold display. In addition, the display mode of the hold display is the same for the hold that is digested during the time reduction and the remaining hold that is digested after the time reduction ends, so that the uniformity is increased.
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort in the production in the time saving mode, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 81 (or 2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the 98th special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

The second hold display unit 630b has a hold display 633 corresponding to the second start memory (special figure 2 hold).
c is newly displayed. The hold display 633c is also on hold like the hold display 633b.

After that, when the special figure 2 variable display game of the 99th time reduction is executed, the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the same screen transition as the (ki) of FIG. 79, and the screen transition of the 100th time reduction is the (ku) of FIG. 79. The screen transition is the same as (ke). Then, after the end of the time reduction, the effect control device 300 (
This) The result screen 670 may be displayed as shown in the transition.

In addition, in the screen transition example of (ki) to (ke) of FIG. 79 in the above-mentioned type 1 type 2 mixer, the hold display 633b, 633c, 633d, 633e displayed on the second hold display unit 630b is excessive. It was explained that it is the second remaining hold of the remaining hold. However, if the transition from (or 2) in FIG. 81 to (ki) to (ke) in FIG. 79 occurs in the 100-time time saving machine, the hold display 6
33b, 633c, 633d, and 633e become the first residual hold (remaining hold) that occurs during the time reduction and is digested after the time reduction ends. Since the special figure 2 variable display game based on the four remaining holds can be executed after 100 times of time reduction, the player should aim for a big hit by playing the special figure 2 variable display game 104 times (100 + 4 times) in total. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Special Figure 2 Screen transition example in the modified example of hold display]
With reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, a display mode in which the result display up to the total digestion of the special figure 2 hold is continued as a display mode of the modified example of the special figure 2 hold display. In the following modification examples up to FIG. 87, the gaming machine 1 of the type 1 type 2 type mixer (time reduction once) described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80.
This is a modified example of the special figure 2 hold display at 0.

FIG. 82 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of the screen transition in the modified example of the special figure 2 hold display. FIG. 83 is an example (second half) of the screen transition in the modified example of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 82 (ki 2) shows the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first residual hold in the time saving medium occurrence hold digestion mode after the end of the time saving. It is a screen.

After the hold shift, when the special figure 2 change display game is executed based on the change hold display 633 of the third first remaining hold (second start memory), the change hold display 633 of the hold digestion area 640.
The number of remaining modes displayed in is, for example, "1 remaining". In addition, special figure 1 hold number display unit 65
The number indicating the number of special figure 1 hold of 0 is "1", and the number indicating the number of special figure 2 hold of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is "4". That is, in FIG. 82 (ki 2), the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold are the same as those of FIG. 79 (ki), and there is one 1st remaining hold and 2nd remaining hold in standby. Is three.

Here, as shown in FIG. 82 (ki 2), the effect control device 300 displays the hold display 633a of the first remaining hold, but does not display the hold display of the three second remaining hold. Therefore,
Since only the first remaining hold (hold display 633a) is displayed, it is possible to play a game to determine which hold is executed until the hold is exhausted in the predetermined effect mode (remaining hold digest mode in the transition state). It becomes easier for people to understand, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since only the first remaining hold that is strongly related to the effect to be executed is displayed, an effective effect can be performed, and the second remaining hold that is weakly related is hidden, which hinders the effect. Since it is possible to suppress the game and make it easier for the player to concentrate on the production, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Although the hold display of the second remaining hold is not displayed in the figures after (ki 2) of FIG. 82, the number "4" indicating the number of hold of special figure 2 is displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of special figures 2 held.

FIG. 82 (K2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold after the end of the time reduction.

After the hold shift, the special figure 2 is based on the changing hold display 633a, which is the fourth first remaining hold.
The variable display game is executed in the same manner as in (Ki 2) of FIG. 82, and the number of remaining modes displayed on the variable pending display 633a of the reserved digestion area 640 is switched to, for example, "remaining 0".

Further, the effect control device 300 maintains a state in which the hold display of the second remaining hold is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b. The number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is "
3 ”.

In FIG. 82 (Ke 2), the special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold, and the second start memory (Special figure 2 hold) is displayed after (K2) in FIG. 82. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when it occurs.

When the second remaining hold of the second start storage occurs, the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 becomes “4”. At that time, since the hold display is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b, the special figure 2 hold number display unit 6 makes it easy to understand that the second start memory has occurred.
A character (for example, the character "new") for notifying that the second start memory has occurred may be displayed near 60.

In FIG. 82 (ko 2), the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold and transitions to the result screen 670 after (ke 2) in FIG. 82. It is a display screen of.

In the latter half of the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining hold, the effect control device 300 displays the game result for a predetermined period on the display screen of the display device 41, and the result screen 6
70 is displayed (result display). While the effect control device 300 displays the result screen 670, the hold display of the second remaining hold is maintained in a state of not being displayed on the second hold display unit 630b. Therefore, the hold display of the second remaining hold is not displayed on the display screen, and instead, the result screen 670 is displayed in a large size, so that the player can easily see the result screen 670 and enhance the interest of the game. Can be done.

FIG. 82 (Sa 2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display.

With the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second residual hold, the effect is switched from the time-saving medium-occurrence residual hold digestion mode to the excess hold digestion mode (result mode). The result screen 670 is continuously displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

FIG. 82 (2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold is stopped. Further, (2) to (2) of FIG. 83 are display screens of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second to fourth second remaining hold. Is.

In this modification, for example, the result mode is continued even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the first second remaining hold stops fluctuating, and as shown in (2) of FIG. 82, the result screen 670 is displayed. The display is maintained. In the variable display area 615, the small symbol stops fluctuating, and the missing symbol (
For example, "267").

After that, the result mode is continued even when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the second to fourth second remaining hold, and the result mode is continued from (2) to (2) in FIG. As shown in
The display of the result screen 670 is maintained. At that time, the number indicating the special figure 2 hold number of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 decreases by one each time the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and finally (No. 2) of FIG. 83. ), It becomes "0".

Therefore, since the result mode is maintained until all the second remaining hold is exhausted, it is possible to secure a longer time for confirming the result screen 670, and the player does not panic the result of the game. You will be able to check slowly. Further, since the result screen 670 can be displayed relatively long, the effect control device 300 may display more detailed data such as the effect content on the result screen 670.

FIG. 82 (2) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining hold is stopped.

When the special figure 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining hold stops fluctuating, the result mode ends, the effect is switched to the normal mode, and the result screen 670 is hidden. Also,
In the variable display area 610 of the display screen, the out-of-bounds symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, "41"
6 ”) is displayed. Then, similarly to () in FIG. 80, the reserved digestion region 640, the first reserved display unit 630a, and the left-handed display 671 are displayed. 1st hold display unit 630a
The hold display 633f corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is displayed in.

After that, in (chi 2) (tsu 2) of FIG. 82, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) as in (chi) (tsu) of FIG. 80. , Out of design (for example, "5"
It stops fluctuating at 21 ").

The timing at which the result screen 670 is hidden is not limited to the timing at which the special figure 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining hold is stopped, but also at the timing when the special figure 1 variable display game is started. Well, it may be the timing when both conditions are satisfied.

[Special Figure 2 Screen Transition Example in Modified Example 2 of Hold Display]
With reference to FIG. 84, a display mode at the time of result display will be described as a display mode of the modified example 2 of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 84 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in the modified example 2 of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 84 (ke) shows the second after the (ku) of FIG. 79 in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first residual hold during the time-saving medium-occurrence residual hold digestion mode. Start memory (Special Figure 2 hold)
Is the display screen of the display device 41 when the above occurs, which is the same as (ke) in FIG. 79. When the second remaining hold of the second start memory occurs, the hold display 633e corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new").

(3) of FIG. 84 shows the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining hold and the result screen 670 is displayed after the (ke) of FIG. 84. This is the display screen.

The special figure 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining hold, and in the latter half of the variation, the effect control device 300 displays the result.

At that time, in the second modification of the special figure 2 hold display, the effect control device 300 hides the variable display area 610 during the result display, while the second hold display unit 630b and the hold digestion area 640.
Maintain the display of. Therefore, the player can confirm the number of the special figure 2 hold by visually recognizing the hold display of the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 and the second hold display unit 630b, and the special figure 2 hold is the second. You can easily confirm that it is on hold.

In addition, in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the variable display area 6 is similarly shown in FIG. 79 (ko).
Since the result screen 670 is displayed larger instead of 10, the result screen 67 is displayed.
It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize 0, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

FIG. 84 (3) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display in the result mode.

The display of the result screen 670 is maintained on the display screen of the display device 41, and at the upper part of the holding display 633b during the change of the holding digestion area 640, a character "end" is used to notify the end of the time saving middle occurrence remaining holding digestion mode. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that a series of effects by the plurality of special figure 2 variable display games based on the special figure 2 hold and the first remaining hold during the time saving have been completed.

Further, the first second remaining hold is located in the hold digestion area 640 as the changing hold display 633b, and the hold displays 633c and 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold of the second hold display unit 630b.
3d and 633e are also located one to the left. In the result mode (excessive hold digestion mode), the effect control device 300 omits the shift effect of the hold shift according to the shortened change (fixed change time value) of the special figure 2 change display game, and holds the second remaining hold. May be digested earlier. Further, the effect control device 300 may display to the player which hold display is digested in an easy-to-understand manner without omitting the shift effect of the hold shift.

FIG. 84 (3) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game based on the first second remaining hold is stopped.

For example, in the second modification of the special figure 2 hold display, the result mode does not end even if the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold stops fluctuating, and the result mode is shown in (3) of FIG. As shown, the display of the result screen 670, the second hold display unit 630b, and the hold digestion area 640 is maintained.
In the variable display area 615, the small symbol of the out-of-order symbol (for example, "267") stops fluctuating.

Then, in the result mode, the result screen 67 is displayed until the second remaining hold is completely consumed and the variable display area 610 and the first hold display unit 630a are displayed as shown in (2) of FIG.
Similar to 0, the display of the second hold display unit 630b and the hold digestion area 640 is also maintained. Therefore, the player can easily confirm which hold display is digested until the second remaining hold is completely digested.

[Special Figure 2 Screen Transition Example in Modified Example 3 of Hold Display]
With reference to FIG. 85, a display mode before the result display will be described as a display mode of the modified example 3 of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 85 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in the modified example 3 of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 85 (ki 4) shows the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first residual hold during the time saving medium occurrence residual hold digestion mode after the end of the time reduction. It is a display screen of.

In FIG. 85 (ki 4), the hold display 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold of the second hold display unit 630b.
3b, 633c, and 633d have the same display mode (the same display mode as the hold display of the first start memory (holding in FIG. 1)).
For example, it is displayed as "○").

On the other hand, the hold display 633a corresponding to the first remaining hold is a predetermined display mode (for example, "▽").
Is displayed, and a pedestal (for example, "□") is displayed at the lower part of the hold display 633a.

(K4) and (K4) of FIG. 85 are display screens of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining hold. In FIG. 85 (Ke 4), a new second
A second remaining hold has occurred as a start memory (hold in special figure 2). Similarly, in (ku 4) and (ke 4) of FIG. 85, the hold displays 633b and 633c corresponding to the second remaining hold of the second hold display unit 630b.
, 633d and 633e are displayed in the same display mode (for example, "◯") as the hold display of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold).

Therefore, the second residual hold that is digested in the excess hold digestion mode (result mode, special mode) is displayed in the same display mode as the hold display of the first start memory that is digested in the normal mode that shifts immediately thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort in the effect caused by the display modes of the second remaining hold and the hold display of the first start memory being different. In addition, the second remaining hold and the first
Since the hold display of the start memory is displayed in a common display mode, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of the production during the variable display game, so that the player can easily concentrate on the production and enhance the interest of the game. ..

After that, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect to the result mode of the excess hold digestion mode and display the result screen 670 as shown in FIG. 79 (ko) (result display).

[Special Figure 2 Screen Transition Examples in Modifications 4 and 5 of Hold Display]
With reference to FIG. 86, a display mode after the result display will be described as a display mode of the modified examples 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 86 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of screen transitions in the modified examples 4 and 5 of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 86 () is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display in the result mode.
It is the same as (sa) in FIG. 79. After that, for example, in the display mode of the modified example 4 of the special figure 2 hold display, the screen transitions as shown in (5) of FIG. 86, and in the display mode of the modified example 5, (6) of FIG.
The screen transitions like this.

FIG. 86 (5) is a display screen of the display device 41 in the modified example 4 of the special figure 2 hold display when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold stops changing. ..

In (5) of FIG. 86, hold displays 633c and 63 based on the second start memory (second remaining hold).
The 3d, 633e and the hold display 633f based on the first start memory are the common hold display unit 630.
It is displayed collectively in c.

The common hold display unit 630c is a common hold display area for the hold display based on the second start memory (second remaining hold) and the hold display based on the first start memory. That is, the common hold display unit 630
c is a display unit including the first hold display unit 630a and the second hold display unit 630b.

In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the hold display of the second remaining hold in a predetermined display mode (for example, "▽") so as to be easily distinguished from the display mode of the hold display of the first start memory (for example, "○"). Can be displayed with.

Therefore, by using the common hold display unit 630c and performing the hold display in a plurality of display modes in this way, the number and types of hold displays in standby can be easily understood, and the player can easily grasp the flow of the game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 86 (5) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining hold. From result mode to special mode (
Even if the effect is switched to (dedicated mode), the effect control device 300 is similarly the common hold display unit 6
30c can be displayed and the hold display can be performed collectively.

After that, similarly, after the special figure variation display game is executed based on the third and fourth second remaining hold, the effect control device 300 shifts to the screen as shown in () of FIG. 80, for example. Then, the effect can be switched from the special mode to the normal mode.

On the other hand, (6) of FIG. 86 shows the display of the display device 41 in the modified example 5 of the special figure 2 hold display when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold stops changing. It is a screen.

In FIG. 86 (6), the first hold display unit 630 is divided into independent hold display areas.
a and the second hold display unit 630b are simultaneously displayed at the lower part of the display screen.

The effect control device 300 displays the display area (for example, a broken line square frame) of the second hold display unit 630b so as to be easily distinguished from the display area of the first hold display unit 630a (for example, a solid line square frame). can do.

FIG. 86 (6) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second hold. According to the movement of the hold display, that is, according to the number of holds in FIG. 2, the ratio of the first hold display unit 630a in the independent hold display area increases, and the ratio of the second hold display unit 630b decreases. ..

Therefore, by comparing the ratio of the first hold display unit 630a and the second hold display unit 630b in the independent hold display area, the number of the second remaining holds on standby can be easily understood, and the player can play the game. Since it becomes easier to grasp the flow of the game, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

After that, similarly, after the special figure variation display game is executed based on the third and fourth second remaining hold, the effect control device 300 is similarly described in FIG. 80, for example, as in the modified example 4. The screen can be changed as shown in.

[Special Figure 2 Screen Transition Example in Modified Example 6 of Hold Display]
With reference to FIG. 87, as a display mode of the modified example 6 of the special figure 2 hold display, a display mode of the hold during digestion after the result display will be described.

FIG. 87 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition in the modified example 6 of the special figure 2 hold display.

FIG. 87 () is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining hold during the result display in the result mode.
It is the same as (sa) in FIG. 79. Further, () in FIG. 87 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining hold has stopped fluctuating, and is the same as () in FIG. 79. Is.

When the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second remaining hold is stopped fluctuating with an outlier symbol (for example, "267"), the effect control device 300 ends the result display, hides the result screen 670, and hides the result screen 670. The variable display area 610 on which the outlier symbol is displayed is displayed.

FIG. 87 (7) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining hold.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the second second remaining hold, the hold digestion area 640 does not change the position of the hold display 633f of the first start memory of the first hold display unit 630a.
The changing hold display 633c is displayed. The changing hold display 633c is a changing hold display based on the second second remaining hold.

Further, as shown in (7) of FIG. 87, the effect control device 300 replaces the predetermined display mode (for example, “▽”) with the same display mode as the hold display of the first start memory (for example, “◯”). ), The variable pending display 633c can be displayed.

In this way, by displaying the changing hold display 633c of the second remaining hold in the same display mode (for example, "○") as the hold display of the first start memory, the second remaining hold and the first start memory It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity in the effect caused by the different display modes of the pending display during the fluctuation of. In addition, since the second remaining hold and the changing hold display of the first start memory are displayed in a common display mode, it is possible to suppress the hindrance to the production during the variable display game, so that the player concentrates on the production. It becomes easier and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

After that, similarly, after the special figure variation display game is executed based on the third and fourth second remaining hold, the effect control device 300 shifts to the screen as shown in () of FIG. 80, for example. be able to.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is a game (variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game,
Special Figure 2 Variable display game))), a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game-related effect, an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game, and a display means capable of displaying the effect. (Display device 41). In the game machine 10, the game control means can generate a specific game state (time reduction state (time reduction mode)) as a game state advantageous to the player, and the effect control means changes from the specific game state to the normal game state (normal mode). When shifting to (transition state (excessive hold digestion mode)), a predetermined start memory display (second start memory) according to the start memory (second start memory) of the main game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the specific game state. 2 Specific display unit of display means (display of remaining hold) (starting memory display area (hold digestion area 640, first hold display unit 630a, second)
It is not displayed on the hold display unit 630b)).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to make the display mode easier for the player to grasp which effect (a series of effects) corresponding to the specific gaming state is executed until which hold is exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the game machine 10 includes a start storage means (RAM 111c of the game control device 100) capable of storing start memory (first start memory, second start memory) as a game execution right. The effect control means is a start memory generated in a specific game state (a second start memory that is digested in a short time).
It is possible to display a start memory display (for example, a rectangular square frame serving as a pedestal (display of "□") as a predetermined display mode) according to the first remaining hold, etc. on the specific display unit.

According to such a game machine 10, since the hold display is performed in a plurality of display modes, the number and types of hold displays can be easily understood, and the player can easily grasp the flow of the game. Can be improved.

Further, in the game machine 10, after the end of the specific game state, the effect control means executes the first effect (excessive hold digestion mode (result mode, special mode)) and the subsequent second effect (normal mode), and the second effect. The 2 effects are executed in connection with the main game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the normal gaming state.

According to such a game machine 10, the game based on the second start memory is executed in a mode different from the game based on the first start memory, so that the changing game is the game based on which start memory. It will be easier for the player to understand if there is any. As a result, the player can raise a feeling of expectation particularly for the result of the game when the player is in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means can switch the mode of the effect when the game is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) based on the start memory generated in the specific game state (for example, 100 times).
For example, switching from the time saving mode to the normal mode), and the start memory display corresponding to the start memory (for example, the 100th time) of the last game of the predetermined number of games is displayed in a special mode (for example).
For example, "LAST" is displayed on the lower pedestal).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can recognize the end timing of the specific gaming state from the hold display without paying attention to the display of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, so that the flow of the game can be grasped. It becomes easier to play and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the specific display unit has a standby hold display area (first hold display unit 630a, second hold display unit 630b) that displays a start storage display before the game is executed, and a start memory during the execution of the game. Includes at least one of the variable pending display areas (holding digestion area 640) displaying the display.

According to such a gaming machine 10, by visually recognizing at least either the waiting hold display area or the changing hold display area, the player corresponds to the specific gaming state until which hold (starting memory) is exhausted. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the production (a series of productions) is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the game of a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions (1 time) + 4 times) based on the start memory generated in the specific game state is completed, the effect control means displays a special image (result) in the display means. Screen 670) can be displayed, and even if the start memory of the main game in the specific game state occurs after the specific game state (second remaining hold), it is special until all the games based on the start memory are completed. The image is continuously displayed, and while the special image is being displayed, the game execution time is fixed without being selected by distribution (lottery).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the special image is continuously displayed until all the main starting memories (second remaining hold) in the specific gaming state are digested, so that the changing game is the first.
It becomes easier for the player to understand whether the game is based on the start memory of the start memory or the second start memory, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the game machine 10, the effect control means displays a predetermined start memory according to the start memory (holding during time reduction, first remaining hold) that occurs in the specific game state and the game is executed after the specific game state. (Hold display during fluctuation of the hold digestion area 640) indicates the number of games (number of game executions) until all games are completed based on the start memory (notifies the player of the remaining number of times in the predetermined effect mode). It can be displayed with the characters to be used (for example, "remaining x").

According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the timing at which the game is completed based on the start memory, which occurs in the specific gaming state and the game is executed after the specific gaming state. Can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, a predetermined start memory display (hold display of the second start memory (for example, “▽”)) is displayed by the start memory generated in the specific game state and the start memory generated after the specific game state. Is displayed in a different mode (presence or absence of a predetermined display mode (for example, a rectangular quadrangle “□” serving as a pedestal)).

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the player can easily identify the start memory generated in the specific gaming state, the production (a series of productions) corresponding to the specific gaming state is executed until which hold is exhausted. It becomes easier to understand whether or not the game is played, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to replace the time saving state with the probabilistic state. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention may be applied to other types of gaming machines (
It can also be applied to slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

For example, when the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game medium used for the game is a medal (coin) instead of the game ball, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals paid out. Then, in the slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the accessory ratio is
Ratio of the number of medals paid out in the specified period to the number of medals paid out by various bonuses (
%).

10 Pachinko machine 25 Direction button 30 Pachinko board 32 Pachinko area 34 Pachinko machine start gate 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area 86 (V winning opening)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming control means capable of executing a game,
Equipped with a variable winning device that can be converted into an open state and a closed state in a specific game state,
The game control means
The game value given to the player when the game has a special result in the specific game state is different from the game value given to the player when the game has the special result after the end of the specific game state. A game machine characterized by that.

Images